Home

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP0R User's Manual

1. ry sis SK ii G A ao x XY 3 Insert the crimped wire into the housing until it contacts the back side 4 When removing the wire use a flat head screwdriver or other similar tool to pull up the hold down pin of the housing and then pull out the wire 9 15 5 Wiring of COM Port 5 7 1 Suitable Wires and Wiring Method Terminal block Suitable wires A screw down connection type is used for the COM port Use the suitable wires given below COM port RS232C port terminal layout COM port RS485 port terminal layout Signal ground Trasmission line A E Trasmission line paces Seana E Terminal station setting Send data Output Terminal block The communication connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used Phoenix Contact model No Model No Product No MKDS1 3 3 5 1751400 Suitable wires Twisted wire Size s Cross sectional area i AWG 28 to 16 0 08mm to 1 25mm7 Use the above wires shielded it is recommended to ground the shielded part Also if using a pole terminal refer to 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type 5 16 Wiring method 1 Remove a potion of the wire s insulation 5 mm 2 Insert the wire into the COM port until it contacts the back side f fa U7 YA ff F 3 Tighten the screw 14 W gt For tightening the terminal block When tightening the
2. Initial speed kHz Time Home retum start R30 Mo Pulse output instruction flag e ti S C dwC Data table Data register Setting item Unit No Example of sample program Settable range Type O No target value Output type CW CCW Set according to the control code H1000 0000 Forward on the next page H1000 0010 Reverse DT302 Initial soeed Hz K1000 K1 to K50000 DT304 Target speed Hz K 000 K1 to K50000 DT306 a aa eras K1 to K32760 Target value K 2 147 483 648 to K Note 1 Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers 2 When the control type 0 No target value is specified for the control code the target value pulse number of data table is invalid 3 For the JOG operation the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed 50 kHz is specified as acceleration time or deceleration time For the details refer to 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions DT300 Control code 8 29 Sample program 30 DF F1 DMV __ H 10000000 DT300 T r _ F1 DMV __ H 10000010 DT300 Ty 0F F1 DMV 1000 DT302 ii DF F1 DMV K7000 DT304 F1 DMV K2000 DT306 F1 DMV K1000 DT308 F1 DMV KO DT310 R30 w5 F172 PLSH DT 300 R31 Control code H 10 Fixed a Control assignment 0 JOG m Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 without target value 1 Type 1 with target values
3. b222 2 22 4p22 14 ms 220ms Target speed 25kHz 20000 pulses Initial speed 1kHz JOG positioning operation start po flo JOG positioning operation running moo i 1 I JOG positioning operation R301 parameter setting i JOG positioning operation complete R302 Position control start input R31 i Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Data table Data eee Setting item Unit Example of sample program Settable range JOG positioning Type 0 pT300 Control code CWICCW ee a H1010 0000 Bea K 2 147 483 648 to K DT310 Target value pulses K20000 2 147 483 647 Note 1 Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers 2 For the type 0 of JOG positioning control instruction F171 the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed 50 kHz is specified as acceleration time or deceleration time For the details refer to 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions 3 When the target value is set to zero the operation stops once the position control start input turns on 8 44 Sample program R30 R9120 R302 R300 DF R300 R300 R301 DF Hooo R301 F DMV H10100000 DT 300 F1 DMV K1000 DT 302 F1 DMV K25000 DT 304 F1 DMV K300 DT 306 F1 DMV K450 DT 308 F1 DMV K20000 DT 310 F171 SPDH DT 300 _ KO R31 HDF Fo mv H140 DT 90052 Fo MV H 100 _
4. COM port coms Cancel Baud rate 115200 lt r Initialize Data length 6 7 bits i bits Help Stop Bit f 1 bit 2 bits Paip f Non i Odd f Even Time out 5 sec Parameter for automatic setting W Baud rate W Data Length M Parity 2 Specify the communication setting as the table below Once the setting has been completed the communication with the USB becomes available Network type C NET RS232C COM port number allocated for the USB Baud rate The baud rate cannot be specified Even if any rate is selected the setting will be invalid USB2 0 FullSpeed Data length Stop bit Party Odd o O 6 12 Chapter 7 Communication 7 1 Functions and Types 7 1 1 Communication Modes and Communication Ports On the FPOR four different communication modes are available According to the communication mode to be used the usable communication ports vary Communication mode Usable communication port Computer link General purpose serial communication PC PLC link MODBUS RTU 7 1 2 Computer Link Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC The PLC answers automatically to t
5. Diode Reverse voltage 3 times the load voltage Averag rectified torward current Load current or more Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Inductor Output o i T Load Output baked Lead Load terminal T aii pad L Fpor terminal FPOR COM mo COM Use an external fuse as overload protection A fuse is not built in the output circuit It is recommended to install external fuses on every circuit in order to prevent the output circuit to be burned out when the output is shorted However in some cases such as shortcircuit the element of the unit may not be protected 5 3 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings Separate the input output and power lines Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 5 10 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type Supplied connector and suitable wires The connector listed below is supplied with the unit Use the suitable wires given below
6. Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network The same number must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network Note When using the PC PLC link with the RS232C the number of units is 2 7 36 7 6 3 Setting Communication Parameters PC PLC Link Settings for baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click the COM Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Gonftfiguration Untitlel Hald Nor hald Acton an Error fi Ho 413 Communication Format Tine No 4t0 Unit Ho Link 0 0 Ho412 Comm Mode har Eit fg Bits outs sity Odd Controller input settings HSC Pe Link Parity Odd Controller output settings PL5 Fit Woden Enabled Fa Sir Ete hooo y Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Terminator ER r Time constant setting of CPU input Header st not exist Tea Rot No4i5 Baudiate 115200 bps Hote Starting address tor data recerned ot DT i 0 1234 senal data communication mode Hadir Euter capacity setting for date teceiwed ot m qe onde serial date communication mode p nd Cancel Read PLE Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 16 No 412 Communication Mode Click on
7. 0 Fixed m Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only a Movement direction In case of Type 0 without target value 0 Forward 1 Reverse In case of Type 1 without target values 0 Incremental 1 Absolute m Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Precautions during programming For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 e Performing rewriting during RUN stops the pulse output 8 30 Sample program JOG operation Type 1 With target value The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from YO when using forward rotation and Y1 when using reverse rotation with the following conditions Initial soeed 1 KHz Target speed 5kHz Acceleration time 120 ms Deceleration time 120 ms When the elapsed value absolute value reaches K324000 positive direction and K 45600 negative direction the deceleration stop is performed Timing chart Frequency Acceleration time Deceleration time 120ms Target value match ak se EEEE AAS Time JOG operation R31 R32 command i m JOG operation start R3A R3C JOG operation parameter setting R3B R3D Pulse output of 1 a instruction flag R9120 Data table Data register Setting item Unit Example of sample program Settable range No Type 1 With target value DT300 Gani
8. 1 Once the FPOR is connected the following screen is displayed It will automatically disappear after a short time ML Installing device driver software gt Click here for status Device driver software was not successfully installed gt Click here for details 2 Click the start menu and move the mouse pointer to Computer and right click on it to select Properties an sticky Notes Computer BQ Snipping Tool Control Panel ay Manage eT XPS Viewer Windows Fax and Scan Devices and Pr Map network drive Disconnect network drive Default Progra i Sh Deskti a Remote Desktop Congftti EEEE EN Help and Supp Rename Shut down gt 3 As the following screen is displayed click Device Manager l Control Panel Home View basic information about your computer led Device Manager Windows edition g Remote settings Windows 7 Professional System protection Copyright 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved g Advanced system settings Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 4 Double click on FPOR dilou Ti File Action View Help e H i 4h FPWIN t 4 Computer gt Sq Disk drives yy Display adapters 43 DVD CD ROM drives Floppy disk drives Floppy drive controllers Human Interface Devices IDE ATA ATAPI controllers lt 5 Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices Monitors gt Processors b
9. KO Not output deviation counter Deviation counter clear clear signal l KO N signal output time O OOUE K1 to K200 x 0 5ms 0 5ms 100ms Note 1 Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers 2 The time from the initial speed to the target speed is specified as acceleration time The time from the target speed to the creep speed is specified as deceleration time For the details refer to 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions 8 34 Sample program R20 R9120 R202 R200 HDF R200 R200 R201 mO s T R201 F1 DMV H10010010 DT200 F1 DMV K1000 _ DT 202 F1 DMV K5000 DT204 F1 DMV K300 DT 206 F1 DMV K500 DT 208 F1 DMV K2000 DT210 F1 DMV KO DT212 F177 HOME DT 200 _ KO XO HDF Fo mwv H10 DT 90052 Fo MV H 100 DT 90052 R9120 R200 T10 R202 HDF A R202 TMX 10 K 3 Control code 10 Fixed u Control assignment 0 JOG m Control assignment type 0 Home return type 0 1 Home return type 1 00 Fixed a Operation mode assignment 0 Forward 1 Reverse m Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Precautions during programming For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration
10. Start L J bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S27 STD D gt 81 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 j E 5L bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S24 1 S2 STD gt D 1 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 or S14 1 1 S24 1 S2 STD lt 1 92 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 L bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S24 1 S2 He STD lt Le 1 25 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact p0 81 825 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare _ 2s Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S24 1 S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact p0 5152 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ANDs Connects a Form A normally open contact D S1 89 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L AL comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S141 S1 S2 1
11. Terminal station setting was not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system was used Please contact your dealer The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The IC memory card installed is not compatible Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH FP10SH MEWNET W2 MCU The MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communication unit is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred gt Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose AJA gt gt Oo ST S gt S gt gt gt gt ee gt AI
12. The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows re a Data received A C STA D VY E EIx F 6 Sm HE from external Reception code is device Cannot be stored when l reception done flag is deleted by F159 pa MTRN r a ON Reception done flag R9038 OFF Reception done i ON flag is turned off by executing F159 MTRN F158 MTRN l OFF instruction execution Receive buffer Number of bytes lt 3 gt g gt cf gt lt 7 gt lt 0 gt lt gt g gt g 1 gt g 1 gt received eer i Number of bytes f Number of bytes Number of bytes Write pointer p f received is cleared received is cleared received is cleared when the header is when F159 MTRN when the header is received is executed feceived The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order When the header is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 is on Also When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address If there are two headers data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer The rec
13. 12 Right side connector for FPO expansion This is used to connect the FPO cum FP2 expansion unit installed on the right side of control unit to the internal circuit The connector is located under the seal 9 DIN hook This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch It is also used to install the unit on the slim type mounting plate AFP0803 2 3 2 2 Input and Output Specifications 2 2 1 Input Specifications Input specifications for all types Insulation method Rated input voltage 24 V DC 21 6 V DC to 26 4 V DC Approx 2 6 mA For C10 6 points common For C14 C16 8 points common Output points per common For C32 T32 F32 16 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 2 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 VDC 1 2 mA input impedance 20 us or less OFF ON Note The input time constant can be set using system registers 0 1 ms to 64 ms ON OFF Operating mode indicator LED display Note This specification is applied when the rated input a voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 C Response time Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature T32 at 24 V DC 16 9 Number of Ky 7 at 26 4 V DC points per KE common whi
14. Note2 X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CHO to CHS When using the home return function of the pulse output always set the home input In that case X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high speed counter Note3 C16 type For performing the home return for the pulse output CHO with deviation counter clear the above Y6 should be set to the normal output to use Y6 for the deviation counter clear signal For performing the home return for the pulse output CH1 with deviation counter clear the above Y7 should be set to the normal output to use Y7 for the deviation counter clear signal The home return cannot be performed for the pulse output CH2 with deviation counter clear Note4 C32 T32 F32 type When performing theo home return with deviation counter clear the deviation counter clear ae pong to each CH are used fixedly as follows CHO Y8 CH1 Y9 CH2 YA 3 For performing the home return for each type it is necessary to specify the home input corresponding to each channel to be used for the home return in the system register 401 Home input corresponding to each channel CHO 4 CH1 X5 CH2 X6 CH3 X7 For performing the JOG positioning for each type it is necessary to specify the position control starting input signal corresponding to each channel to be used for the JOG positioning Notes The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 to 405 15 7 FPOR Default eT
15. Output 4 points 10 points Input 6 points Output 4 points 14 points Input 8 points Output 6 points 14 points Input 8 points Output 6 points 16 points Input 8 points Output 8 points 16 points Input 8 points Output 8 points 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 points 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 point Specifications Power supply voltage 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common Relay output Relay output Relay output Relay output nn Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Connecti Terminal connector Terminal block connector block connector Terminal block Molex connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector COM port RS232C RS485 Product No AFPORC10RS AFPORC10RM AFPORC10CRS AFPORC10MRS RS232C AFPORC10CRM RS2
16. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FPOR Users Manual ARCT1F475E 2 2011 8 panasonic electric works net sunx Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the product It could cause excessive
17. R30 R302 R300 DF R300 R300 R301 DF R301 F1 DMV H10110000 DT 300 F1 DMV K1000 DT 302 F4 DMV K5000 DT 304 F1 DMV K300 DT 306 F1 DMV K20000 DT308 F1 DMV K100 DT 310 F1 DMV K300 DT F1 DMV K100000 DT314 F171 SPDH DT 300 KO R31 R300 HDF H HH Fo mv H 140 DT 90052 Fo MV H 100 x T 90052 R9120 R300 T30 R302 HDF A R302 TMX 30 K 3 Control code 10 Fixed Control assignment 1 JOG positioning Control assignment 2 1 Type 1 alnterrupt assignment 0 Execution during main program 1 Execution during interrupt program Trigger is level type Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Precautions during programming For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 When the instruction is started during the interrupt program specify the execution in the interrupt program with the control code When describing the same channel in both the normal program and the interrupt program be sure to program not to execute them simultaneously 8 47 8 4 14 JOG Positioning Control Type 0 Change Speed F171 Use the type 1 to change the speed to a speed faster than the target speed Time chart Acc
18. Sound video and game controllers p lll System devices p Universal Serial Bus controllers Device type Other devices Manufacturer Unknown Location Pot _ 0001 Hub_ 0005 Device status The drivers for this device are not installed Code 28 There is no driver selected for the device information set or element To find a driver for this device click Update Driver Update Driver 6 Click Browse my computer for driver software _ Update Drive How do you want to search for driver software Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation settings Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually 7 Click the Browse button to specify the folder that the USB driver of FPOR has been stored and click Next If the location was not changed when installing FPWIN GR the USB driver of FPOR has been stored in C Program Files Panasonic EW SUNX Control FPOR USB Ko _ Update Dri Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location C Program Files x66 Panasonic EW SUNX Contro FPR USB V Include subfolders Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver sof
19. a Help C 4 digits Hex f 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode f Access f Protect 8 digits password E Enter in alphanumeric akka Setting for FP memory loader option T Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 9 7 9 2 Upload Protection 9 2 1 Upload Protection Overview of program upload protection function This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program uploading If the upload protection is set note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disabled to be uploaded after that Transferring programs to the FP memory loader will be also unperformable The setting can be cancelled using the programming tool however all ladder programs system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled Editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool However the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched When using this function store ladder programs as files without fail Interaction with the password protect function The password setting can be specified simultaneously for the PLC in which this function is set This function can be also set in a password protected PLC IEF er Note When performing Release the upload protection by compulsion All progr
20. 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only as Operation mode assignment 0 Increment 1 Absolute Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Precautions during programming For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 Specify the composite speed to make the component speed of each axis be 6 Hz or more Set the composite speed Initial soeed to be 30 Hz or less For the linear interpolation instruction F175 specify the same value for the acceleration time and deceleration time To perform the operation only to the negative direction in the incremental mode set the target value to zero To perform the operation only to the negative direction in the absolute mode set the target value to the same as the current value When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed 8 52 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions The method to calculate the acceleration deceleration time and the speed table for acceleration deceleration differs according to the type of pulse output instructions Select an appropriate type of instruction according to applications Acceleration deceleration characteristics of each instruction Common to JOG operation Type 0 and Type 1 F172 Specify the time fr
21. 15 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD BCD data COIN OP WON O 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000 00011001 00011010 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100111 00011101 00011110 00011111 00111111 11111111 00001111 1001 1001 15 81 15 7 ASCII Codes b7 rare ae eRe 4 e e e e ole x Jes Jes Joe e e oe oe ee oe jos ee J em ex en e ae fo oe o o Jo o o e o 15 82 Record of changes ARCT1F475E May 2009 First Edition ARCT1F475E 1 Sep 2009 Second Edition ARCT1F475E 2 Aug 2011 3rd Edition Addition FPOR Control Unit RS485 Type FPOR Expansion Unit Error correction Please contact Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd m Overseas Sales Division Head Office 2431 1 Ushiyama cho Kasugai shi Aichi 486 0901 Japan m Telephone 81 568 33 7861 m Facsimile 81 568 33 8591 panasonic electric works net sunx
22. 16 bit ST _ Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 data compare Start gt 1 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 E L bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt 82 or S1 gt S2 ST gt E gt 51 52 5 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 STs npe Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 E 1 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 ST lt gt or S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 ee ee ee ee ee 2 251 59 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 16 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact f 8182 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact AND pf 8 825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact fF 5452 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact f 7 825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact _f
23. AJAJAJAJA AJAJAJAJAJA O gt gt a S T S S S S o gt de es T T f f oi gt e es S T f f y p gt dea S S S S S S O dea T S S S S S o gt a gt s f S S S S gt gt ER A Available 15 77 15 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Description NACK error Link system error WACK error Link system error Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format error Link unit hardware l Link system error error Link system error 127 Link system error Link system error Link system error Link system error Transmission i Link system error impossible error Communication stop Link system error No destination error Link system error Other communication i Link system error error 140 BCCerrr A transfer error occurred in the received data 141 Formaterror gt A command was received that does not fit the format 142 No support error A command was received that is not supported e ee procedure error frames 0 uniceesing ror Miner by olga ho anamision ion oo Link setting error l aena l number by designating the transmission Station eee aiea e a time out error buffer is congested cee Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link error unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame Busy error processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 160 Parameter error Content of specified paramet
24. DT60 and DT61 before al _ gt SS gt 1 7 55 Flow chart For Type Il Data initialization DT50 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 NO Increments DT50 and DT51 bomen F145 Sends a data Sends a data SEND instruction write command read command Turns RO off Execute F146 RECV instruction YES The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data No H7788 in the unit number 07 from the COM port 3 Reads the data No H7788 in the unit number 07 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM port 7 56 Chapter 8 High speed Counter Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions 8 1 Overview of Each Functions 8 1 1 Three Pulse Input Output Functions There are three functions available when using the high speed counter built into the FPOR High speed counter function Encoder output is inputto FPOR The high speed counter function counts external the high speed counter inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired output Motor Encoder STOP signal Tape lead wire Pulse output function Stepping motor Combined with a commercially available motor Servo motor a driver the function enab
25. Europe Headquarter Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG m Head Office Rudolf Diesel Ring 2 D 83607 Holzkirchen Germany m Telephone 49 8024 648 0 US Headquarter Panasonic Electric Works Corporation of America m Head Office 629 Central Avenue New Providence New Jersey 07974 USA m Telephone 1 908 464 3550 Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd 2011 ARCT1F475E 2
26. Final timing at which the The count is not incremented because the count input changed previous JP instruction from off to on after the final timing at which the previous JP was not executed instruction was not executed 12 8 12 4 Precautions for Programming Programs which are not executed correctly Do no write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly lt Example 1 gt NS xo f xt YO H DF 7 H x2 When X1 was on prior to X0 YO will not be on even if XO becomes on lt Example 2 gt ANS TMX 5 K 30 YO TMX5 will activate if X1 becomes on regardless of whether XO is on or off aneen T RS H Y1 ae nok L pees When X2 was on prior to X0 Y1 will not be on even if XO becomes on When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction Examples in which the above programs are rewritten correctly lt Program in which the example 1 is rewritten gt xO x1 YO ir 41 IF x0 X2 E lt Program in which the example 2 is rewritten gt X1 TMX5 K30 gt YO H l x lt Program in which the example 3 is rewritten gt XO X1 YO F _ XO x2 Y1 H HoF H XO X3 E 12 9 12 5 Rewrite Function During RUN 12 5 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How operation of rewrite during R
27. Incremental counting mode with not direction output 2 Pulse width specification FPO It is possible to set the fixed pulse width 80us or duty ratio FPO compatibility mode The settings are invalid and the duty ratio of pulse width is fixed at 25 6 F168 SPD1 instruction specifications Positioning control Home return The specifications during pulse output are changed FPO The elapsed value during home return is not fixed It becomes zero when home return is done FPO compatibility mode The elapsed value is counted even during the home return operation It becomes zero when home return is done 7 Real number calculation process As the accuracy of real number calculation has been improved the calculation result in the FPO compatibility mode may differ from the result in the existing FPO program 8 Process when a secondary battery is out of charge T32 type only If the secondary battery installed in the T32 type is out of charge the next power on process will be different FPO The value in the hold area of data memory will be unstable FPO compatibility mode The value in the hold area of data memory will be cleared to 0 XI XII Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 1 Unit Types 1 1 1 FPOR Control Units Program 16k steps 16k steps 16k steps 16k steps 16k steos C16 16k steps 32k steps C32 32k steps 1 2 C10 C14 No of O points 10 points Input 6 points
28. Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8 unit link the largest station number is 8 relays and register have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 8 16 x 4 119 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 119 11 43 ms Each Ts 5 11 43 16 43ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 8 2 79 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 32 64 x 4 407 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation example 6 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 1 1
29. Pulse output YO oe input X4 Position control starting input XO PWM output YO Normal output Y2 Y3 Pulse output Y2 Y3 Pulse output Y2 Y3 Home input X5 Pulse Pulse output Y3 Mall input X5 Position ma control starting input X PWM output PWM output Y2 settings Normal output Y4 Y5 YO to Y7 Pulse output Y4 Y5 Pulse output Y4 Y5 Home input X6 Pulse output Y4 Y5 Home input X6 Position control starting input X2 PWM output Y4 Normal output Y6 Y7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Home input X7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Home input X7 Position control starting input X3 PWM output Y6 Normal output Y7 XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 u gt O u O TT O Q 2A ho O a i dace Controller output settings 2 PLS PWM Inter Pulse catch rupt input settings Pulse catch Interrupt input settings settings Not set Controller input The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Not set Controller input The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input MO X1 MZ X3 Xd XS X5 XT Leading edge AO AT AZ AS A4 AS AG Ar Interrupt edge setting for controller input Leading edge Trailing edge The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge Note1 When using the pulse outoput PWM output the controller output settings must be specified The output that has been set to the pulse output PWM output cannot be used as the normal output
30. SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 0 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same control error time as a command being processed 15 79 15 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Reads the on and off status of contact Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units bac oom seas O re bs core range Write data area WD Writes data to a data area TS Monitors a registered contact or data using the M M i E h f ifi ina 16 Preset contact area fill command SC AS aa O epee tee ene ae point on and off pattern i Wri h h f Preset data area fill command SD rites the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register AR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the Remote control programmable controller Doon S Aborts communication Read contact area Write contact area 15 80
31. Target Le ngg K6 to K50000 speed HZ DT506 Acceleration time K300 K1 to K32760 Settable range ms DT508 Deceleration time ms K300 K1 to K32760 DT510_ X axis target value pulses K5000 K 8 388 608 to K 8 388 607 DT512 Y axis target value pulses K2000 K 8 388 608 to K 8 388 607 DT514 X axis component speed The result is stored as 2 words in real type Initial soeed Hz Xaxi i d X axis compo composite speed x X axis movement amount DT516 axlS Component spee nent speed T X axis movement amount Y axis movement amot Target speed Hz Y axis component speed Initial speed Hz Y axis component speed Target speed Hz Note Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers DT518 Y axis compo _ composite speed x Y axis movement amoun nent speed or X axis movement amount Y axis movement amot DT520 8 51 Sample program R50 R9120 R9121 R504 R500 DF R500 R500 R501 en i es El R501 HDF F1 Dmv H 10000000 DT500 F1 DMV K500 DT502 F1 DMV K5000 _ DT 504 Fi DMV K300 DT506 F1 DMV K300 DT508 F1 DMV K5000 DTS510 F1 DMV K2000 DT512 F175 SPSH DT 100 KO R9120 R500 R504 R502 or R502 R9121 R500 R504 R503 Hor R503 R502 R503 TO R504 R504 TMx 0 K3 Control code a 10 Fixed a Control assignment 0 Interpolation a Type 0 Linear interpolation 0 Fixed Output assignment
32. When no pulse is measured fi than th Measured pulse cycle is stored in the following DT after the ant en ag aiir i measurement DT100 1 is stored in ips unit DT202 DT203 1 ms unit DT204 DT205 DT204 and DT205 Sji Example When a single pulse of 250Hz was measured repeatedly Pulse number measured within 100 ms 25 Error 1 is stored in DT200 and DT201 Pulse cycle 1 250 x 10 4000 Error 1 is stored in DT202 and DT203 Pulse cycle 1 250 x 10 4 Error 1 is stored in DT204 and DT205 Sample program F178 Reads the elapsed value of high speed counter CHO DT900300 DT90301 to DT166 DT67 0 Compares it with the previous read elapsed value DT68 DT69 If unmatched exectues F178 R9010 H F1 Dmv DT90300 DT66 R900B R80 F60 CMP DT66 DT68 F178 Execution condition Executes F178 instruction Measurement limit 1 s Measurement unit 1us and ims No of moving average 5 times 7 Channel No CHO Measurement cycle 10 ms DT60 DT61 Stores pulse number DT62 DT63 Stores pulse cycle in 1ps unit 4 DT64 DT65 Stores pulse cycle in 1ms unit R80 F178 PLSM H 5350 K 10 DT60 F178 Execution condition Converts the measured pulse cycle us to frequency Hz Performs real number calculation for the reciprocal of the measured pulse cycle DT62 DT63 to DT72 DT73 7 Rounds off the real number and stores it as integer data DT72 DT73 to DT70 DT71
33. afar Lk Higher bytes Lower bytes Reading Writing Hour data Minute data DT90053 HOO to H23 HOO to H59 Available Not available Minute data Second data l DT90054 HOO to H59 HOO to H59 Available Available Day data Hour data DT90055 H01 to H31 HOO to H23 Available Available Year data Month data DT90056 HOO to H99 H01 to H12 Available Available Day of the week data Setting of Clock Calendar Function Setting using a programming tool Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Data and Time under Tool on the menu bar Set PLC Date and Time dialog box at PLC Dana anal Tiete Lati ls z The above steps display the Set PLC Date and Time dialog box shown at the left Input the date and time and click on the OK button PIC Fama Date ws eA Tie Firm Hele Using FPWIN Pro 1 Select Online Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the Shift and Esc keys at the same time to switch to the Online Mode screen 2 Select Special Relay Special Data Register under Monitor on the menu bar 3 The screen will appear to set various parameters 2 12 Setting and changing using program 1 The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which are allocated as the clock calendar setting area are sent 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT
34. code PBCC calculation 1 S2 S3 D Creates the code for checking the data specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in D The calculation method is specified by S1 Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD gt H 42 41 44 43 BAD Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D Example H 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DC BA Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 gt H 32 31 34 33 2143 Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 H3412 432 1 Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes P70 F71 P71 HEXA PHEXA Hexadecima S1 S2 D data gt ASCII code F72 P72 ASCII code Hexadeci mal data AHEX PAHEX 1 S2 D BCDA PBCDA F73 P73 4 digit BCD data gt ASCII code 1 S2 D F74 P74 ASCII code 4 digit BCD data ABCD PABCD 1 S2 D BINA PBINA F75 P75 16 bit binary data gt ASCII code 1 S2 D N 001 Q Available Not available Not available partially 15 50 Boolean Description rand FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP1
35. g S terminal lt al 24V DC a j T LO z 6 e eo a teminal 2 5 Relay output specifications C10 C14 Output type 1a output Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC 2A 30 V DC 4 5 A or less common C10 2 points common 1 point common 1 point common C14 4 points common 1 point common 1 point common Response OFF gt ON Approx 10 ms time ON gt OFF Approx 8 ms Mechanical Min 20 000 000 operations Switching rate 180 times min Lifetime Electrical Min 100 000 operations Switching rate 20 times min at rated control capacity Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Note Resistance load Output points per common Circuit diagram 3 2 w p c 2 6 2 3 Terminal layout diagrams C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM pad pad C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM The above illustration is the terminal block type 2 Model No Terminal layout diagrams C16T C16CT Front view of connector Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Front view of connector Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally 2 8 Model oae Terminal layout diagrams X0 7 XO X1 X2 X4 X5 m O X6 5O C COM COM Output Minaj EVE Front view of connector ACS ca Note Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two
36. n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the left F105 Right shift of one BSR Shifts the one digit of data of D to P105 hexadecimal digit 4 PBSR the right bit F106 Left shift of one BSL Shifts the one digit of data of D to P106 hexadecimal digit PBSL the left 4 bit D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by D2 n D1 and D2 to the right Pioa Petr P108 multiple bits n bits PBITR F109 BITL D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by P109 bits n bits PBITL D2 n D1 and D2 to the left F110 WSHR D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by P110 word 16 bit PWSHR D2 D1 and D2 to the right k z b iz NO U TI O O o amp C C C h X C C x C O x x F111 Left shift of one D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by P111 word 16 bit PWSHL D2 D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one WBSR D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSR D2 D1 and D2 to the right bit Left shift of one WBSL D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSL D2 D1 and D2 to the left bit Available X Not available Not available partially O 15 52 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope Boolean p Description rand Pns T Pro bur deine TEET u5 Temoins o o FIFO buffer define FIFT Loa The n words beginning from D are PFIFT de
37. settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PC PLC link the link transmission cycle will be longer Reference lt 7 6 7 PC PLC Link Response Time gt Setting PC PLC link switching flag PC PLC link switching flag can be set using system register no 46 If it is set to O default value the first half of the link relays and registers are used If it is set to 1 the second half of the link relays and registers are used First half VWVWLO to WL63 LDO to LD127 is used Second half WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD255 is used Main flag Link area First half 1 WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD225 Second half O WLO to WL63 LDO to LD127 7 43 7 6 6 Monitoring When using a PC PLC link the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relays For PC PLC link 0 R9060 to R906F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9080 to R908F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data Exclusive internal relays link relays L and data registers link registers LD are shared between the connected PLCs Wto 16 15 14 ejem olol s 7 sls lalale m Conditions ON When the PC PLC link is normal for on of
38. stop is performed Even when the home input is on the pulse output starts by the execution of this instruction When the near home input turns on during acceleration the deceleration operation starts 8 35 8 4 9 Trapezoidal Control Instruction F171 This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table while the trigger execution condition is on Control method of Trapezoidal control instruction F171 Type 0 and Type 1 There are two kinds of operation modes which are type 0 and type 1 Type 0 For type 0 the time from the initial speed to the target speed is specified as acceleration time or deceleration time The time specified in a program is set as the acceleration time to be processed in the PLC as is The same is true for the deceleration time After the execution of the instruction the speed up to the target speed can be changed Acceleration time Deceleration time specified in program specified in program Speed can be changed in a range up to S0kHz gt the target speed right after the execution Target speed EEE 50kHz gt T spee ii j Tangel speed ge fen eee eenen After speed change Initial speed Initial speed Acceleration time Deceleration time speed change command calculated in PLC calculated in PLC Rewrite the set target speed Type 1 For type 1 the time from the initial s
39. the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the D 3 D 2 The real number data from the area specified by S1 to S2 are stored in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Scaling linearization on a real number data table is performed and the output Y to an input value X is calculated N N N NO E A gt 2 O Available Not available Not available partially This instruction is available for FP 32k type This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP 10SH cannot be used E3 FP2SH FP10SH 15 65 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope es Boolean p Description rand Time series processing instruction PID processing S PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 Easy PID S1 Temperature control PID can be S2 easily performed using the image S3 S4 of a temperature controller Compare instructions F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area P373 revision PDTR specified by S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area P374 revisio
40. x 4 31 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 1 2 976 3 976 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms Note In the description stations that have been added refers to stations which are connected between station no 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on Comparing examples 2 and 3 the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not been added to the link As a result the PC PLC link response time is longer The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or more stations that have not been added to the link 7 46 Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added lf there are stations that have not been added to the link the Tlk time link addition processing time and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer T max s1 s2 7sn Tit Tso Tik TIK Tle link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis link error stop command sending time Tso master station scan time With the SYS1 instruction the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced Thus SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time lt Pro
41. 0 Fullspeed Computer link Slave COM port RS232C port i esription Data length 7 bits 8bits Parity None Even Odd Communication format Start code STX No STX End code CR CR LF None ETX Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Computer link Master Slave Modem initialization General purpose communication MODBUS RTU Master Slave PC PLC link A maximum of 16 units can be connected by converting to RS485 Communication function Factory default po Baud rate Datalength Parity Stop bit Tool port 9600 bit s 8bits Odd bit Odd tit COM port RS232C port 9600 bit s 13 6 COM port RS485 port ees ae Interface SAB Shielded twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission General purpose serial l purp ASCII Binary code communication Don ee pma peset stopbit NonelEveniOdd O O Oo by system register Computer link Master Slave Modem initialization Communication function General purpose communication MODBUS RTU Master Slave PC PLC link Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below For baud rate 115 2 kbps For baud rate 19 2 kbps 99 Number of units stati
42. 1 D Time CSUB S1 S2 The time that results from subtraction PCSUB D subtracting S2 1 S2 from the time S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D Serial port MTRN S n D This is used to send data to an communication PMTRN external device through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM port P161 reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of the specified MCU BIN arithmetic instruction BIN arithmetic instruction S O F160 Double word DSQR S D P160 32 bit data PDSQR V S D 7 X square root High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e High speed MV Performs high speed counter and counter and oe Pulse output controls according Pulse output to the control code specified by T controls S The control code is stored in DT9052 Change and Transfers S 1 S to high speed read of the Broos counter and Pulse output speed 7 D AINA elapsed value Brooks coum area of high speed DT9044 Transfers value in high speed counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed 7 RRR Pulse output value area to D 1 D High speed HC1S n S Yn Turns output Yn on when the counter output elapsed value of the built in high set with speed counter reaches the target K channel value of S 1 S specification Q Available Not available A Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver
43. 14 2 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S PC connection cable 3000 3 fey 2 46 0 2 PC side Pinto Signal name ES 2 n H 5 a aan a 5 H Qo p il ba od m l AAH ol m FLHLH opa y I O k Socket Inch screw thread 4 40 5 2 3o E 1 a 4 1 4 5 9 Unit mm 14 2 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port MAIDS CIN Z we 9 L mm 500 16 1000 9 AFc8s32 2000 0 GY then REY H Unit mm 14 7 14 8 Chapter 15 Appendix 15 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of timers and counters System registers 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 2 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 13 When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to 0 3
44. Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Suitable wires Twisted wire Size Nominal cross sectional area Insulation thickness Rated current AWG 22 Dia 1 ia 1 1 A AWG 24 Connector for loose wire cable Attached to the control unit and expansion I O unit Unit type and required quantity Manufacturer Type and product No es cie Ei6 C32 T32 F32 E32 Housing 10P 2pcsxiset 2pcsx2sets Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co semi cover 10P 4 pcs x 1 set 4 pcs x 2 sets Ltd Contact for AW22 and 24 4 pcs x 1 set 4 pcs x 2 sets 5 pins Note The parts of the number of the connectors are supplied with the product If you need more connectors purchase AFP0807 2 sets pack Pressure connection tool Manufacturer Product No 7 Electric Works SUNX Co AXY52000FP 2 pcs x 1 set Pressure connection tool 3 Key Point When using a MIL connector for flat cables purchase the product number AFP0808 4 pcs 10 pin Strain relief with key In this case the suitable wire is AWG 28 and the rated current is 1A Wiring method The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire s insulation saving labor 1 Bend the welder contact back from the carrier and set it in the pressure connection tool If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure connected the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press t
45. C Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the contact of the timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing and counting will not take place during control The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Operation during operation For small sized PLCs FPO FPOR FP and FP X The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of operation However as the R or Y is set reset again right before the peripheral service as the above procedure C the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly rewritten to a specified value For medium sized PLCs FP2 FP2SH For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction the value of the forced processing has a priority When rewritten by a high level instruction the result of the instruction has a priority 12 15 12 16 Chapter 13 Specifications 13 1 Table of Specifications 13 1 1 General Specifications tem Description Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC Allowable momentary C10 C14 C16 5 ms at 20 4 V 10 ms at 21 6 V power off time C32 T32 F32 10 ms at 20 4 V use Built in Not replaceable Ambient temperature O to 55 C tora
46. COM port Self diagnosis functions Watchdog timer Approx 690 ms program syntax checking 1 The specification is when rated input voltage is at 24 V DC and temperature at 25 C Frequency may decrease depending on voltage temperature or operating condition 2 No of channels A total of 4 channels is available for pulse output and PWM output Frequency Pulse output can be specified up to 50 kHz PWM output can be specified up to 4 8 kHz An error on the pulse width that is a maximum of 40us may occur for the setting value depending on voltage temperature or operating condition 3 Guaranteed number of writing is up to 10000 times 4 Auto backup area when power is off Type C10 C14 C16 C32 T32 C1008 to 1023 C Contact EV C1008 to 1023 C Contact EV Backup Elapsed value Elapsed value area R2480 to 255F R2480 to 255F DT12000 to 12314 DT32450 to 32764 5 All the areas of timer counter internal relays link relays link registers and data registers can be held Non hold areas and hold areas can be specified by the setting of system register 6 Notes about built in backup battery T32 only Secondary battery is used for this product It has not been charged when it is shipped from the factory Energize and charge it before you use it The secondary battery does not have a function to notify the battery voltage reduction However if the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite the values in the hol
47. DT 90052 R9120 R300 T30 R302 DF R302 TMX 30 K 3 Control code H LJ 10 Fixed m Control assignment 1 JOG positioning Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 alnterrupt assignment 0 Execution during main program 1 Execution during interrupt program Trigger is level type Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Only when the target value is set to 0 the pulse output direction can be reversed by changing the output type assignment from 0 1 2 to 4 5 6 Precautions during programming For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 When the instruction is started during the interrupt program specify the execution in the interrupt program with the control code When describing the same channel in both the normal program and the interrupt program be sure to program not to execute them simultaneously 8 45 Sample program JOG positioning operation Type 1 When the trigger execution condition is on the JOG operation is started When the position control start input turns on the position control is performed up to a specified target value after changing the target speed at the changeover time specified in advance Time chart Acceleration time Deceleration time 300ms 10
48. DTO to in 16 bit units one word DT12314 DT32764 i This is a shared data memory which is used Link register Note2 LD 256 words LDO to LD255 within the PLC link Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Timer Countersetvaie Data memory for storing a target value of a timer Note2 1024 words SVO to SV1023 and setting value of a counter Stores by area SV l timer counter number TimedGounteeelacsed Data memory for storing the elapsed value Note2 p 1024 words EVO to EV1023 during operation of a timer counter Stores by value area EV timer counter number Special data register 440 words Data memory for storing specific data Various DT DT90000 to DT90439 settings and error codes are stored Index register 1 14 words I0 to ID Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier Timer T gt amp oc gt ho E Master control relay points MCR 256 points Number of labels JP and LOOP 220 polls Number of step ladders 1000 stages Number of subroutines 500 subroutines C10 11 programs 6 external input points 1 periodical interrupt point 4 pulse match Number of interrupt points programs Other than C10 13 programs 8 external input points 1 periodical interrupt point 4 pulse match points Decimal constants K 32 768 to K82 767 for 16 bit operation Integer type K K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 for 32 bit operation Hexad
49. Operation mode setting on error System registers 20 23 and 26 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 4 Time settings System registers 31 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 5 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET W0 PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 6 Input settings System registers 400 to 405 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function 7 Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 421 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication 8 Input time constant settings System registers 430 to 433 Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering or noises 15 2 Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Optio
50. Q Available X Not available Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 3 For FR2SH FP10SH and FP X Ver2 0 or later any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction 4 5 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number 15 40 UP DOWN counter Shift register Left right shift register Boolean F118 UDC F119 LRSR Control instructions Master control relay Master control relay end Auxiliary jump Label Symbol Data PSRWRA Masher contro area MCE n h Description Increments or decrements from the preset value S ba
51. R80 H F313 F f1000000 DT 62 DT 72 4 F178 Pulse cycle Execution condition F332 DROFF DT72 DT70 1 Stores the elapsed value at the time of measurement as the previous value DT66 DT67 to DT68 DT69 R9010 H F1 omv DT66 DT68 8 3 6 High speed counter control flag Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the high speed counter Allocation and role of high speed counter control flag When a high speed counter instructions F165 F166 F167 F178 is executed the high speed counter control flag of the corresponding channel is ON No other high speed counter instruction can be executed as long as this flag is ON The high speed counter control flags are allocated to each channel R9112 R9113 Operation of high speed counter control flag The high speed counter flag varies during scanning Replace it with an internal relay at the beginning of the program when using it several times in the program 8 15 8 3 7 Sample program Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FPOR Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input A Operation start Encoder Motor rminal Output termina faerie Inverter operation YO 3 Operation Stop E Operation chart I O allocation VO No a i O xXx Encoder input XR
52. R9110 High speed counter CHO control flag 8 17 Program When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops R9110 R103 DT90300 _ F167 HCIR KO K 5000 YO Sets high speed counter CHO R100 H F61 DCMP K4500 DT90300 pares R100 R900C R102 R102 Y1 Hor Jeees R R9110 R100 TO R103 Hor R103 8 18 Positioning operations running I s m o l ee eee l l ee I mf Positioning operations start J T e ee ee ie i ee eee ie eee es eee ime _ Resets elapsed value of high speed counter CHO _ _ f Target value match off instruction l YO goes off when elapsed value of high E speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses _ ks i 32 bit data comparison instruction R9000 turns on when the CHO high speed counter Slapeed value becomes greater than 4500 pulses 8 4 Pulse Output Function 8 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and the contents of the controls number deceleration stop i elapsed value counter during the pulse output control F172 F177 Trapezoidal F171 Automatically outputs pulses with the trapezoidal control by contro
53. Read Write 4X Registers Read Write DT Table for MODBUS reference No and FPOR device No MODBUS reference No Zata on oe PLC device No hexadecimal F145 SEND Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word 4 OX 1X 4X X 0X X 0X 4X 4 Guil 000001 001760 0000 06DF Y0 Y109F 002049 006144 0800 17FF RO R255F 100001 101760 0000 06DF X0 X109F C32 T32 F32 400001 432765 0000 7FFC DT0 D1T32764 ene 300001 300128 0000 007F WLO WL127 pee 302001 302256 07D0 08CF LDO LD255 Holding C10 C14 C16 400001 412315 0000 301B DT0O DT12314 register 7 51 7 7 2 Setting Communication Parameters Settings for baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click the COM Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting of CPU input Tool Port No 415 Baudrate 115200 bps Notie Starting address for data received of DT 0 0 123144 serial date communication mode PLC Configuration Untitle1 E x Hold Non hold Action on Error i fi m No 413 Communication Format Time No410 Unit No Link WO 0 No 412 Comm Mode Char Bit E Bits Link WO 1 EBER a odd tis Controller input settings HSC AARAA Parity Odd a Controller output settings PLS P W
54. S2 ANDe Connects a Form A normally open contact po 5152 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 E AND pees AND lt Connects a Form A normally open contact De 1 82 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L l comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S24 1 S2 compare ORD lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in pb 31 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt 82 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in Os 5132 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in pe 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact in poe 5 5 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S27 comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORDs Connects a Form A normally open contact in pP al or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2
55. S2 type data S3 D zone control Floating point FMAX S1 S2 type data PFMAX D maxi mum value Floating point S1 S2 D type data mini mum value type data total and mean values Floating point i S1 S2 D Floating point FSORT S1 S2 type data sort PFSORT s3 Scaling of FSCAL S1 S2 real number PFSCAL D data J J 3 J J Description When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 3 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 lt 0 0 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 0 D 1 D When 3 1 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D Searches the maximum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Searches the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained The total value is stored in
56. Terminal layout diagrams E8X E16T Input No input for E8YT E8YT Front view of connector ACS a Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Input No input for E16YT X0 7 X8 F A H P xo x1 5 o gt xe xo m HHRH 2 7 O z 7 n HIR H rt Output No output for E16X Front view of connector ic Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally 3 8 Model tg Terminal layout diagrams E16P Input No input for E8Y FP ma 3 Output Front view of connector ACS Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally 3 9 3 10 Chapter 4 I O Allocation 4 1 V O Allocation FPOR control unit XO XF YO YF e j J E scocs L mE FPO FPOR expansion unit X20 X3F Y20 Y3F X40 X5F Y40 Y5F X60 X7F Y60 Y7F Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3 Note The usable I O numbers are different depending on the units Regarding I O number Specifying X and Y numbers On the FPOR the same numbers are used for input and output Example ee The same numbers are used for input and output Expressi
57. The header is added automatically 1 22 specify K 8 7 5 4 Receiving Data Data register DT pain ai Data input from the communication port is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register and the reception done flag goes on If the reception done flag is off data can be received at any time Data reception External device Reception done flag on Data table for reception receive buffer This is the state when the above program is executed DT200 The received number of DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive buffer bytes is stored as data is f DT201 H42 B H41 A stored System register settings are as follows DT202 H44 0 H43 C Received data is stored in System register 416 K200 DT203 eee ere System register 417 K5 DT204 Haa H HATIG Receive buffer when reception ts completed Sample program for receiving data 10 byte data received in the receive buffer through the communication port 1 are copied to DTO R9038 DF oe B RIQ UR ST SS SS SESS ng SESS o SESS SS Se HH Fio BKMV D201 DT204 f Retrieving received data The received data in the receive buffer is The contents of the four words read from the area in which it is stored i from DT201 to DT204 1 D201 jand sent to DTO J R10 F159 MTRN DT 100 _ KO Preparing to receive the next data L To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instructon
58. The year month day hour minute second Clock calender setting 2nd day of the week data for the DT90054 minute second clock calender is stored The built in T32 only clock calender will operate correctly through T32 only program that uses the FO MV instruction see example for DT90058 Clock calender setting Higher byte Lower byte DT90056 year month Pe T32 only Minute data Second data Day data Hour data DT90055 101 to H31 HOO to H23 Year data Month data DT90056 H00 to H99 HO1 to H12 Clock calender setting DT90057 Padia DT90057 day of the week HOO to HO6 the year 2099 and supports leap years The Clock calender setting clock calender can be set by writing a value DT90055 day hour using a programming tool software or a T32 only As a day of the week is not automatially set on FPWIN GR fix what day is set to 00 and set each value for 00 to 06 15 25 FPOR A Available N A Not available jAaaress tame enero The clock calender is adjusted as follows When setting the clock calender by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction lt Example gt Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on X0 HDF Fo mv H 0 0790054 arid seconds
59. Unit 2 1 2 1 Part Names and FunctionS annannennennennannannnnrnnrrrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrerrsrrsnene 2 2 2 2 Input and Output Specifications 00nnoennoannneanennnnennoennoennnnnnnrnnnnnennnenenne 2 4 2 9 Terminal layout diagramS n nnennennennennennannnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrerrsrrerrsnnne 2 7 2 4 Functions of T32 Control Unit cc ceccccecceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeesseeeees 2 10 3 gt 4 oy a 0 9 RRepr reer ree tree peer errr errr terre terre errr errr errr r er errr rrr cert rrr re 3 1 LT EXPANSION MENO ia 3 2 22 Pant Names and FUNCIONS borsrsiisesier a a 3 3 3 3 Input and Output Specifications cece cceeccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeessaeesees 3 4 24 Terminal lay utdiagra Miesse net caaihasuuiebaueiniensienidons 3 7 AVO NOC ALON vire EAEEREN 4 1 AEO ANOA ane a E E ES 4 2 4 2 I O Allocation for FPOR Control Unit cece cccceceeeseeeeeeeteeeeseeesaeeess 4 3 4 3 I O Numbers of FPO FPOR Expansion Unit ccccccesseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeenees 4 4 5 Installation and Wiring cccesecseseeeeseeceeeeceneeeeseeenseeeeeeseees 5 1 D2 WIS AN ANON ecAeneeseteceucattielesietiaeciaseiesGaeeatcealbbeesdcccganinsiiadeadeciadatawseanentectout 5 2 5 2 Wiring OF POWer SUDD crnan E 5 6 5 3 Wiring Of Input and OQUtDUT sicnesssarise tiani e e a 5 8 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector TyPe ccccccccseececesceseeeseeeesseeeeseeeesseeeaeeeas 5 11 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Bl
60. a san gt pe speed initial speed and target target speed and initial inital 2 son alps pes hin P speed speed speed wiih his 4 De Time l Time Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time _ L_ Speed change command Common to Home return operation Type 0 and Type 1 F177 Specify the time from the initial speed to the target speed as acceleration time and the time from the target speed to the creep speed as deceleration time in the program Each section between the initial soeed and the target speed and between the target speed and the creep speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed Therefore the acceleration deceleration is smoother compared to other control patterns time time Frequency Acceleration Deceleration Target m speed 7777 Ei Calculates the section between inital speed and target speed as speed table of 30 steps Calculates the section between target speed and creep speed as speed table of 30 steps Initial Near home input tt Home input J 1L 8 53 Trapezoidal control Type 0 F171 Specify the time from the initial soeed to the target speed as acceleration time and the time from the target speed to the initial soeed as deceleration time in the program Each section between the initial soeed and the target speed and between the target speed and the initial spe
61. a single instruction and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data 12 2 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT lt Example gt IOWXO0 IOWY1 lIOWRO IOSVO IOEV2 l ODT100 Constants can be also modified lt Example gt I0K10 0OH1001 An index register cannot modify another index register lt Example gt I010 1011 When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32 bit data specify with 10 In this case l0 and I1 are handled together as 32 bit data Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area Contents of 1 Contents of l0 In 1 In 12 2 3 Example of Using an Index Register Repeatedly reading in external data lt Example gt Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DTO RO H KDFHFO MY KO 10 R1 H KDFHFOoO MV WX3 I0DTO 3 F35 1 10 1 When RO turns on 0 is written to index register 10 2 When the R1 turns on the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by IODTO 3 Add 1 to 10 In this case the contents of 10 will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times of R1 Contents of I0 Destination data register 1st 0 DTO 2nd 1 DT1 3rd 2 DT2 Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input
62. and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function N gt ola LL LL AI AIA AIA AIAIAJIAJA A Available 15 73 15 74 Intelligent unit error I O unit verify error Opera tion status Description and steps to take An abnormality in an intelligent unit FPX FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power up gt Check the contents of special data register FPO DT 9010 FP FP X DT9001
63. area starting with S for printing and epee outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F148 Self ERR n Stores the self diagnostic error number P148 diagnostic PERR n k100 n in DT9000 turns R9000 on and error set to K299 turns on the ERROR LED Puse O F149 Message Displays the character constant of S in P149 display the connected programming tool O Available Not available Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later and FP e 3 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FP 32k type 4 This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and FP V3 20 or later s 15 54 Boolean ope Description rand F150 Data read from READ S1 S2 Reads the data from the P150 intelligent unit PREAD n D intelligent unit Data read from RMRD ST S2 Reads the data from the MEWNET F rect unit at the MEWNET F EEE x slave station remote I O slave station Data write into RMWT 1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent MEWNET F PRMWT n D unit at the MEWNET F remote slave station I O slave station eg Sa titittis ota P155 PSMPL Sampling STRG When the trigger of this ical Mill EBD trace stops F157 Time addition CADD S1 S2 The time after S2 1 S2 P157 PCADD D elapses from the time of S142 141 S1 is stored in D 2 D
64. being executed If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed the hold type area may not be kept Also when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode the same event may occur 10 2 10 2 Sampling Trance Function 10 2 1 Overview The sampling trace function is available for the FPOR Using this function enables to take samplings and record accumulate the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing The sampling trace function is used by Time chart monitor under the online menu of the FPWIN GR The instructions functions special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace function are as below Name SCSC sd Cetin O O S O F155 SMPL sampling instruction F156 STRG Sampling stop trigger instruction R902C Sample point flag OFF Sampling by instruction ON Sampling at regular time intervals R902D Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts 0 stops 1 R902E Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on R902F sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts DT90028 Interval of sampling trace KO For sampling by instruction K1 to K8000 10 ms to 30 seconds For sampling at regular time intervals 10 2 2 Details of Sampling Trace Function No of data collectable at o
65. continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for No 26 When operation is resumed it will be continued but will be handled as an error 11 2 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 If ERROR ALARM LED is Flashing Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents error code using the programming tool Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is changed to the PROG mode the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status display dialog box Status Display Untitlel Program Information Program Size Machine Lanquage File Reaister Size 10 Comment Size Block Comment Remark Size PLC Connection PLC Type FPOR 16K Station gt Home Version 1 06 16000 OK Rest Of OK Of OK 100000P Rest 100000 P 5000L Rest 5000 L 5000P Rest 5000 P Scan Time 0 4 msec Condition Normal Min gt 0 3 msec l PLC Mode REMOTE PROG Max 7 7 msec PLC Error Flag Self at Volt Dip 0 120 Error st Advance Unit 0 PLC Mode Flag 120 Yerfi RUN Mode Battery Er TEST Mode STEP RUN Hold Break Mode Message Ope Err Break Enable Remote Force flag External El Self Diagnosis Error Message Eror Code 45 g Key Po Operation Error Occurred int OUT Refresh Clear Error 120 Error
66. earth through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth the varistor may be shorted As for the FPOR control unit since its power supply line is connected to the function earth through a high voltage capacitor it is no problem 24V DC OV Varistor 39 V Function earth FPOR power supply line Do not ground the function earth terminal when grounding a plus terminal of the power Do not ground the FPOR function earth terminal when grounding a plus terminal of the power In some computers the SG terminal of RS232C port and connector shielding are connected In addition an FPOR tool port shielding and function earth terminal are connected Therefore the GND terminal of FPOR and the function earth terminal are connected if the computer is connected Especially when the FPOR is connected to a computer with a plus terminal grounded the GND terminal is in the state that the voltage of 24 V is applied As a result short circuit occurs which may lead to the breakage of FPOR and its neighboring parts if the GND terminal is connected to the earth terminal in that state at Funcation eart Shielding Shielding Grounding Grounding 5 7 5 3 Wiring of Input and Output 5 3 1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Relay output type Sensor T S 2 o OO Power supply for sensor Power supply for i
67. eee output PNP beeen aa 0 3A 16 points 24V DC Input 16 points common 24V 24V DC DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 16 points Input 8 points Relay output Output 8 points en Transistor output NPN 0 3A Transistor output PNP 0 3A Transistor output NPN 0 3A Transistor output PNP 0 3A Transistor output NPN 0 3A Transistor output PNP 0 3A 16 points Input 8 points Output 8 points 16 points Input 8 points Output 8 points 16 points Output 16 points 16 points Output 16 points 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 points 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 points 24V DC common 24V DC common MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector Terminal block Molex connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector AFPORE8YT AFPORE8YP AFPORE16X AFPORE16RS AFPORE16RM 1 1 2 Intelligent Units Product Exclusive Product name cifications Productrame Specicatons Panno Past Bouse FPO Analog I O unit FPO A D Converter unit FPO Thermocouple unit FPO RTD Resistance temperature detector unit FPO D A Converter unit Product name FPO CC Link Slave unit FPO I O Link Unit C NET Adapter S2 type for FPO side C NET Adapter for computer side FP Web Server2 unit lt Input specifications gt No of channels 2 channels Input
68. error IC card read error Sele I O error Description and steps to take I O mapping for remote I O terminal boards remote I O terminal units and I O link is not correct Re configure the I O map for slave stations according to the I O points of the slave stations When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction IC memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged Writing is disabled There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU gt lnstall an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again Abnormal I O unit FP x FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function MEW NET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT9 0002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit
69. from the communication port Receiving data Data can be received when the reception done flag is off The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag turns on and subsequently receiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F159 MTRN instruction and turn the reception done flag off to clear the number of received bytes to 0 To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 set n to KO and then execute the F159 MTRN instruction Binary communication Selecting STX not exist for the header and None for the terminator in the general purpose serial communication enables the binary communication Sending data Sends the data of bytes to be specified Receiving data Check the No of bytes received before the process At that time the reception done flag does not work 7 19 Data to be sent received with FPOR Remember the following when accessing data in the FPOR send and receive buffers If a header has been chosen in the communication format settings the code STX H02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent The data without the code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer and the reception done flag turns on when the terminator end code is rece
70. gt gt 15 20 FPOR A Available N A Not available One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction DT90014 register for data shift F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The instruction value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT90015 DT90015 when the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in D1T90015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33 D or F53 DB is DT90016 executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction After commencing operation the address Operation error where the first operation error occurred is Operation auxiliary register for division instruction DT90017 display The address where an operation error Operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs address latest type the new address overwrites the previous address The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points The data stored here is increased by one every 10 67 us HO to HFFFF DT90020 1 A ring counter Difference between the values of the two DT90018 2 5 ms ring counter Note1 A A A address hold type stored Monitor the address using decima
71. has been set to None the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte For repeated reception of data perform the following steps 1 Receive data 2 Reception done R9038 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN R9038 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data Prepare for reception RO i 7 F159 MTRN DTI0O KO KI The reception done flag R9038 turns on when data A reception from the external device is completed To repeatedly perform only reception Reception of any further data is prohibited specify KO To receive subsequent data you must execute the F159 R9038 also turns off when transmission is Fe 5 performed with a byte number MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done flag specification R9038 1 24 7 5 5 Flag Operation in Serial Communication Header No STX Terminator CR Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows 8 Data received A BY c oR CR D from external device Cannot be stored when reception done flag is on ON Reception done flag R9038 OFF Duplex transmission a l disabled while F159 MTRN is bein F159 MTRN executed OFF instruction execution ON Transmission done flag R9039 OFF EO
72. home input has been completed If the leading edge of home input off to on is detected during the operation at a creep speed after the deceleration operation the pulse output stops Speed Near home _ Home j input ON input ON Max speed Initial speed OHz m gt Home input is effective only after completing deceleration 8 33 Sample program Home return The explanation below shows the case that home return is performed with the following conditions Initial speed 1 kHz Target speed 5 KHz Creep speed 500 Hz Acceleration time 300 ms Deceleration time 500 ms Timing chart Acceleration time Deceleration time Frequency 300ms 500ms Target speed 5kHz Initial speed kHz i Creep speed 500Hz or nc ttt arn rrr Time Home return start R20 During home retum R20 Home return start pulse R201 Home return complete R202 Near home input x0 Home input x4 Pulse output instruction flag rio fo Data table Data register Setting item Unit Example of sample program Settable range No Home return type 1 Operating direction Reverse Set according to the control code vee PONUONGONG CW CCW on the next page H1001 0010 DT202 Initial soeed H K1000 K1 to K50000 Z DT204 Target speed Hz K5000 K1 to K50000 Acceleration time ms K300 K1 to K32760 Deceleration time ms K500 K1 to K32760 Hz DT210 Creep speed K500 K1 to K50000
73. if the DC power is supplied to the control unit Relation between charging time and backup time The number of days in the backup time varies according to the rate of charging time If it is charged on a full charge 72 hours at the ambient temperature of 25 C the backup time will be approx 50 days 100 50 days at 25 C Backup time Battery capacity recovery rate 0 8 16 24 48 72 Charging time h The backup time will vary according to the ambient temperature when the battery is charged Ambient temperature when charged Number of days in backup time 70 C Approx 14 days Approx 25 days Predicted life of built in backup battery The life of the built in backup battery varies according to the ambient temperature while the control unit is on energized Note The temperature when the control unit is off not powered has little influence on the battery life Approx 10 years ACS ner Note The built in backup battery cannot be replaced 2 4 3 Clock Calendar The clock calendar function is available for the FPOR T32 Note As the value is unstable in the initial state write the value using a programming tool Area of clock calendar With the clock calendar function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs Special data i
74. is communicating properly in PC PLC R908A link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC R908B link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC PLC R908C link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC R908D link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in PC PLC R908E link 1 mode Turns off when Sut is stopped when an error Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC R908F link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode A Available N A Not available 15 17 WR909 FPOR Name Description Turns on when Unit No 1 is in the RUN mode ae Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode wl Turns on when Unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode ao Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode ae Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mo
75. is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 RO R2 H iz Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched q R1 F61 DCMP DT50 DT60 O R1 R900B aH l 1 1 F36 D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and SSF DT41 in the unit number 01 from the communication port R1 H F145 SEND DT 100 DT 50 DTO KO 7 FO MV H1 WRO J 70 Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO DT60 7 FO MV HO WRO E 1 93 Flow chart Data initialization DT50 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 NO Increments DT50 and DT51 bomen F145 Sends a data Sends a data SEND instruction write command read command Turns RO off Execute F146 RECV instruction YES The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM port 3 Reads the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local un
76. memory in PLC La 1 sampling data Back to the biginning if exceeding the area if FPWIN GR Untitle1 2 Monitoring Time Chart ij File View Online Settings Option Help Slaj ele sfe fm Yl 2 vo Comment Remark FREE Sampling Times 1000 Times Sampling Rate 100ms Delay Times 100 Times Elansen Monitor configuration Sampling data display z Data entry SE Ee Se ee ee Ee ee ee ee ee 100ms Ons 1000ms 1000ms 2000ms 1000us 2000ms 7 _ ee eae eae Cursor information i la Online Offline Setting Scale Monitor Run Pro u lt gt hia gt lt Ready NUM 1 Sampling at regular time intervals 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to TRACE Set the sampling rate time Sampling Configurations Ea E Cancel Sampling Times fi 000 Times 100 1000 Hel Help Sampling Rate T Every SMPL instruction fi no msec 10 30000 Delay Times fi 00 Times 1 999 10 4 3 Start monitoring Start with the i button 2 Sampling by instruction 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the m
77. method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on 1 Standard operation ON Trigger of D OFF instruction Ses ieee Executed every scan 2 Leading edge detection operation Trigger al Operation of ON instruction OFF a only one time How to perform leading edge detection The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off gt on change of the execution condition trigger is not detected Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next page When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of execution of instructions the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions such as 1 MC and MCE instructions 2 JP and LBL instructions 3 LOOP and LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions 12 6 12 3 2 Operation and Precautions When RUN starts Operat
78. minute and second data minutes and and the converted data is stored in seconds data D 1 D P140 R9009 set PSTC 7 R9009 reset PCLC 7 F142 Watching WDT S The time allowable scan time for the dog timer wor O system of watching dog timer is update changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan F143 Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number P143 update PIORF specified by D1 to the number specified by D2 FPO FP e FPX F144 Serial data TRNS S n The COM port received flag R9038 is communica set to off to enable reception tion control Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM hee S1 S2 Sends the data to another station in the P145 D N network MEWNET via link unit S1 S2 Receives the data to another station P146 PRECV N D in the network MEWNET via link unit Sele jee S1 S2 Sends the data to the slave station as P145 D N the MOD bus master via COM port S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station P146 N D as the MOD bus master via COM port P145 D N the MOD bus master type Il F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station F145 Data send S1 S2 Sends the data to the slave station as pias oe eee a ee coe eco port F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station P146 N D as the MEWTOCOL master via COM port F147 S D Converts the ASCII code data in the
79. n for process gt I control NSTL Starts the specified process n and aa oe clears the process currently started Scan execution type NSTP Starts the specified process n and H i H clears the process currently started Pulse execution type Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process n POLOLO Clear multi SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by 5 slalo 2 ole steps a emai eH n1 and n2 ZE et ha fa j ar oa i ae pogoggg Subroutine instructions Subroutine When the trigger is on Executes the call CALL al subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained Output off When the trigger is on Executes the type FOAL n subroutine subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the call subroutine But the output in the subroutine is cleared Subroutine laa a Indicates the start of the subroutine entry program n return em a a a a a a a u u u u u u u u u OaM mene or pe eT ppke n return Select interrupt enable disable or clear in s Jofo ofolo o contro S1 and S2 and execute Available X Not available Not available partially E Available for FP e only 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 15 42 Oo i Special setting instructions Communic
80. o e DT90243 Unit Station a To No 1 Setting contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 Setting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 e When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the standard setting the A N A values in the home unit are copied in the system registers 46 and 47 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the reverse setting the registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home unit mentioned in the left column will be changed to 50 to 55 and 5 7 and the system register 46 will be set as it is Also the system registers 40 to 45 corresponding to other units will be changed to the values which the received values are corrected and the registers 46 and 57 in the home unit are set for the registers 46 and 47 15 33 Address DT90300 Elapsed Lower words words DT90301 Higher words DT90302 Target Lower words DT90303 Higher words DT90304 Elapsed Lower words DT90305 Higher words DT90306 Target Lower words DT90307 Higher words DT90308 Elapsed Lower words DT90309 Higher words DT90310 Target Lower words DT90311 Higher words DT90312 Elapsed Lower words value area DT90313 Higher words DT90314 Target Lower words DT90315 Higher words DT90316 Elapsed Lower words DT90317 Higher words DT90318 Target Lower words DT90319 Higher words FPOR A Available N A Not available Description Read ye ing Counting area for
81. of all other expansion units If it is installed on the left side the total precision will deteriorate Install the FPO CC Link slave unit on the right side of all other expansion units There is no expansion connector on the right side Install the FPO RTD unit on the right side of all other expansion units 1 7 1 3 Programming Tools 1 3 1 Required Tools for Programming 1 Programming tool software The tool software can also be used with the FP series FPWIN GR Ver 2 or FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Windows software is used with FPOR FP Programmer cannot be used Programming tool software Computer 2 PC connection cable A commercial USB cable A mini B type is used for the connection A cable for connecting a PC Mini DIN 5 pin D sub 9 pin can be also used for the connection DPC connection cable 1 3 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 OS Type of software Operating system Hard disk capacity AFPS10520 Windows 98 FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows ME English language Small type Windows 2000 40MB or more AFPS11520 menu Windows XP Windows Vista Upgrade version AFPS10520R Note1 Ver 1 1 must be installed to install the upgrade version Note2 Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 1 or later free of charge at our web site http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list patch plc jsp Use the latest version Note3 The
82. of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the right together with carry flag R9009 data 32 bit data left DRCL D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate with carry PDRCL by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the left together with carry flag R9009 data Bit manip pulation instructions PBTS the data of D to 1 ae ae aa a as a reset PBTR the data of D to 0 ee ee ee ee PBTI the data of D aia eee aa eae ees 16 bit data bit test BIT D n Tests the value of bit position n of PBTT the data of D and outputs the result O O 0O 0 0 0 to R9OOB bits in 16 bit data PBCU data of S in D ee ee ee bits in 32 bit data PDBCU data of S 1 S in D Pee i a a Q Available Not available Not available partially F125 P125 F128 P128 15 53 FP2SH FP10SH Pao Ope Description lean rand Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary STMR S D Turns on the specified output and ss Jolofofofolo timer 16 bit R900D after 0 01 s x set value ai hic ka Special instructions OZ o O Special instructions F138 Hours min S D Converts the hour minute and second P138 utes and sec data of S 1 S to seconds data and onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D seconds data Seconds to S D Converts the seconds data of S 1 S hours to hour
83. process itil 912 to 927 Step ladder process Pate 928 to 943 Step ladder process ee 944 to 959 Step ladder process eee 960 to 975 Step ladder process DT90121 976 to 991 Step ladder process DT90122 992 to 999 higher byte is not used 15 29 cco Ac DT90123 DT90124 COM SEND RECV instruction end code DT90125 Notused __ _ Forced ON OFF DT90126 operating station display FPOR A Available N A Not available Description For details refer to Programming Manual F145 and F146 Used by the system DT90127 to DT90139 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 0 status MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 1 status MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 0 status 15 30 The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum inerval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the sending operation is performed The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current interval between two receiving operations value in the
84. range Voltage 0 to 5 V 10 10V Resolution 1 4000 Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 lt Output specifications gt No of channels 1 channel Output range Voltage 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 lt Input specifications gt No of channels 8 channels Input range Voltage 0 to 5 V 10 to 10V 100 to 100 mV Resolution 1 4000 Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 Pt100 Pt1000 Ni1 000 Resolution 0 1 C 0 01 C Switch type lt Output specifications gt No of channels 4 channels Output range Voltage output type 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 Current output type 4 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 1 1 3 Link Units Specifications This unit is for making the FPO function as a slave unit of the CC Link Only one unit can be connected to the furthest right edge of the FPO expansion bus Note Accuracy will change if an FPO thermocouple unit is used at the same time This is a link unit designed to make the FPO function as a slave unit to MEWNET F remote I O system Power supply voltage 24V DC 24V DC FPO A21 AFP0480 ARCT1F390 FPO A80 AFP0401 ARCT1F321 K J T R thermocouples resolution 0 1 C FP0O TC4 AFP0420 ARCTIF366 K J T R thermocouples resolution 0 1 C FPO TC8 AFP0421 FPO RTD6 AFP0430 ARCT1F445 FPoaoav A04V AEPon2t 21 ARCT1F382 FPO0 A04l AFP04123 Product Exclusive No manual FPO CCLS
85. signal X9 Positioning start signal Home return start signal XB JOG star signal 8 23 8 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 Pulse output control instruction FO e This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this FO MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO X3 In these programs the near home input is DF FO MV H 110 DT90052 enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations FO MV H 100 DT90052 Operations executable by Pulse output control instruction FO DT90052 Type of ae BIN conve ee Resets the value in an elapsed value area Example For CHO DT90400 and DT90401 disable enable Example For CHO DT90400 and DT90401 output control F166 F167 3 Stop of pulse Forcibly stops the pulse output during the execution of the pulse output output instructions F171 to F177 4 Near home Enables the near home input when executing the home return input instruction F177 Allocates an arbitrary input to the near home input 5 Deceleration Forcibly stops the pulse output during the execu
86. terminal block 3 pin COM port RS232C port terminal layout COM port RS485 port terminal layout Signal ground Trasmission line Receive data Input 7 E Trasmission line E Terminal station setting send data Output 7 4 7 3 Communication Specifications Tool Port Po Description S O Data length 7 bits 8bits Parity None Even Odd Communication format Start code STX No STX End code CR CR LF None ETX Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Computer link slave Communication mode Modem initialization General purpose communication only in RUN mode USB port Pp eseription o o Standard Baud rate USB2 0 Fullspeed Computer link slave COM port RS232C port Po eseription S O Data length 7 bits 8bits Parity None Even Odd Communication format Start code STX No STX End code CR CR LF None ETX Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Computer link master slave Modem initialization Communication mode General purpose communication MODBUS RTU master slave PC PLC link Factory default settings po Baud rate Datalength Parity Stopbit Tool port 9600bits Bbits Odd tit COM port RS232C port 9600 bits Bbits Odd tt 7 5 COM port RS485 Wem o Interface RSA Transmission distance Shielded twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmissio General purpose reral Purpose ASCII Binary n code serial communication Communica paha ts beset by Stoppt ioan O O O sy
87. terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Front view of connector ACS Note Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally 2 9 2 4 Functions of T32 Control Unit 2 4 1 Memory Backup Function The FPOR T32 control unit has a secondary battery Charging type The backup function for the operation memory and clock calendar function can be used Backup of operation memory 1 Timer Counter T C 2 Internal relays R 3 Data Registers DT 4 Step ladders The range specified with a programming tool is the hold area to be backed up If the range is not specified it will be the area of the default Note If the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite the value in the hold area will be cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned on again 3 Key Point Programs and system registers will be held in the internal ROM regardless of the built in back up battery 2 4 2 Built in Backup Battery Time the built in backup battery can be used Backup time The built in backup battery is not charged when the unit is shipped Charge the battery sufficiently before use Full charge Ambient temperature 25 C 72 hours It will be charged automatically
88. the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place The tightening torque 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm Notes for wiring When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construction if the wire is fastened upon counter clockwise rotation of the screw the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clockwise 5 6 Wiring of Molex Connector Type Supplied connector and suitable wires The connector listed below is supplied with the unit Use the suitable wires given below Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Supplied connector Molex Japan model No 51067 0900 ois aida a 50217 8100 Suitable wires Twisted wire Size sis Cross sectional area Insulation thickness AWG 24 18 0 2mm 0 75mm Dia 1 4 to dia 3 0 Pressure connection tool Manufacturer Molex Japan model No Japan Molex Co Ltd 57189 5000 Wiring method 1 Remove a potion of the wire s insulation SS Le o amm 2 5 mm 2 Place the contact in the crimping tool place the wire in the contact and lightly squeeze the tool Sy lo
89. the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte A 0o o 1 7 20 7 5 3 Sending Data Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the communication port Data Data register DT Data transmission using writing as F159 MTRN External device Data table for transmission send buffer When transmission begins K8 When transmission ends KO Reduces one by one at every transmission H42 B H41 A H44 D H43 C H46 F H45 E H48 H H47 G Data table before transmission DT 100 DT101 DT 102 Data is transmitted in order from the low order byte Binary data can be transmitted DT103 DT 104 Sample program for sending data The following program transmits the characters ABCDEFGH Hex to an external device using the communication port RO DF w Data transmission command 7 The internal relay R10 is tumed on when the 1 an _transmission condition RO tums on _ __ Data conversion The characters ABCDEFGH are converted to 1 an ASCII code and written to DT 101 to DT104 H F95 ASC M ABCDEFGH _ DT101 Fis9 MTRN DT 100 Data transmission The data in the send bufferis s
90. to YSF Y40 to YSF Y60 to Y7F e The data of each channel for FPO A D converter unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TC4 FP0 TC8 FPO D A converter unit FPO A04V P0 A041l is switched and read write using a program that includes the flag for switching converted data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual 13 9 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants memory area available for use External input X External output Y Internal relay R 4096 points RO to R255F Relay which turns on or off only within program Link relay L 2048 points LO to L127F This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link This goes on when the timer reaches the specified time It corresponds to the timer 1024 el ee to T1007 C 1008 to ANDET Note2 is goes on when the counter increments It Counter C vie ed nent l corresponds to the counter number Special internal relay R 224 points from R9000 Bast lc a ete on speciic External input wx 110 words WX0 to WX109 ene orien laa ins External output Code for specifying 16 external output points as WY I VONONIS ATOTO NET O3 one word 16 bits of data Internal relay Note2 WR 256 words WRO to W R255 a ae PEAY PONS as Link relay WL 128 words WLO to WL127 an ae nee link relay points as one Note2 Yee NOOS AAO Wolds Data memory used in program Data is handled Data register DT DTO to
91. une d 448 to 463 l pDT90089 Step ladder process Monitor using binary displa 464 to 479 a a ea a DT90090 Step ladder process lt Example gt 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No 480 to 495 DT90100 Step ladder process eines 496 to 511 DT90092 es baits aa Note A programming tool software can be oa process used to write data side 528 to 543 Step ladder process ciated 544 to 559 Step ladder process gaat 560 to 575 DT90096 Step ladder process 576 to 591 Step ladder process 592 to 607 DT90085 t 655 t 651 L647 tL 643 tL 640 Process No 1 During running O During stopping DT90097 15 28 FPOR A Available N A Not available aie tome Been P Step ladder process 736 to 751 DT90107 ae q PEES Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up DT90108 Step ladder process j l 768 to 783 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on DT90109 784 to 799 DT90110 SteP ladder process Monitor using binary display 800 to 815 A A DT90111 Step ladder process lt Example gt 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No 816 to 831 DT90100 f DT90112 step ladder process t e55 e51 e47 teas t 640 Process No 832 to 847 1 During running 0 During stopping DT90113 a aA Pe RRES A programming tool software can be used to DT90114 Step ladder process ited Step ladder process PAR 880 to 895 Step ladder process DT90116 896 to 911 Step ladder
92. uploaded 3 Set the items in the table below and click on the Settings button Digit number select 8 digits Operation Mode Select Protect 8 digits password Enter a 8 digit password Check the box of the function to use Limited distribution function Setting of FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Enable the upload protection setting Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Note This function is available only when a 8 digit password has been set 9 3 3 Table of Corresponding Operations of FP Memory Loader Security Function Note that the operation differs according to the combination of the program stored in the FP memory loader and the status of the PLC to which is written Version check list Status of destination PLC 4 digit password 8 digit password Program in FP memory loader Protected Protected a Password is unset or 4 bit or 8 bit password is set Notset 8 digit password is set and Allow the download in case of same password is set x 8 digit password is set O O and Note1 Note1 Set that PLC cannot be uploaded is set X 8 digit password is set and Allow the download in case of same x xX password is set Note2 Note1 and Set that PLC cannot be uploaded is set Download possible Download possible only for models with the same password x Download impossible Note1 The upload protection
93. when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9063 link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9064 link O0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9065 link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9066 link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error MEWNET i occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode WO Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9067 link O mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error link 0 occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode trans Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9068 mission link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error assurance occurs or when not in the PC PLC Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in R9069 PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC 0 mod Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit N
94. with the system register or assigning an arbitrary contact and operating the bit 6 of the special data register DT90052 with the instruction FO Note6 For the linear interpolation CHO and CH1 or CH2 and CH3 are used in combination Note7 The output frequency is the value only when the conditions of each item such as output method or No of channels are executed This is the value when the pulse input output process is not simultaneously performed or interrupt program is not executed PWM output function High speed Output Pulse output counter contact No instruction Output frequency channel No used flag R9120 R9121 0 0 to 99 9 H 4 8 kH R9122 A Resolution 1000 R9123 Note The PWM output function is only available with the transistor output type 8 5 8 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions Simplified chart Maximum counting speed of High speed counter The maximum counting speed of the high speed counter varies according to No of channels to be used or the simultaneous use of the pulse output function Use the chart below as a guide Frequency kHz Combination with pulse output function Trapezoidal control No change in speed 50kHz Combination of high speed counter No pulse output Pulse output 1 CH Single phase ________ phase Single eH ae p ane phase phase CA E es ada a S ee a A Ap A A A CA JLA AALA oa oa ee 15 Note The maximum counting speed may be lowe
95. 0 D DT90044 to D 1 D F166 Target value much on with channel specification F167 Target value much off with channel specification FPO FP e FPX Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S F171 Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return F172 Pulse output with channel specification JOG operation F173 PWM output PWM output is output from the i with channel al specified output in accordance specification with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse output Outputs the pulses from the with channel specified channel according to specification the Selectable data data table specified by S table control peration Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that F175 Pulse output Linear interpolation F176 Pulse outp
96. 0 DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available Opera tion status System watching dog timer error Slave station connecting Selec time error for MEWNET F system Operation error Description and steps to take Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using system register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and D
97. 0 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1T1 Permissible range for key word no 2 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms Note The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same time should be set for all linked PLCs The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link If short time has been set the transmission assurance relay may not function properly The shortest time that can be set is 100 ms 7 48 7 MODBUS RTU Communication 7 7 1 Overview of Functions The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FPOR and other devices including our FP X FP e Programmable display GT series KT temperature control unit and MODBUS device made by other companies Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions Enables the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped About MODBUS RTU The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them There are ASCII mode and RTU bina
98. 0SH F76 P76 ASCII code gt 16 bit binary data ABIN PABIN Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D S1 S2 D 001 F77 32 bit binary data gt ASCII code DBIA PDBIA S1 S2 Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes S1 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by D S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 D BCD S D Converts the 16 bits of binary data PBCD specified by S to four digits of BCD e data and stores it in D 3 3 F78 ASCII code gt DABI P78 32 bit binary PDABI data J O 16 bit binary data gt 4 digit BCD data Example K100 gt H100 F81 4 digit BCD BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data P81 data gt 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 F82 32 bit binary DBCD S D Converts the 32 bits of binary data P82 data gt 8 digit PDBCD specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data BCD data and stores it in D 1 D F83 8 digit BCD DBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data P83 data 32 bit PDBIN specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary binary data data and stores it in D 1 D F84 16 bit data INV Inverts each bit of data of D P84 invert com PINV plement of 1 F85 16 bit da
99. 0ms 300ms Frequency Target speed 2 20kHz Positioning operation Target speed 1 100000 pulses JOG operation SKHZ f a JOG operation initial speed 41kHz f Gene Time JOG positioning operation start R30 oy S oe JOG positioning operation running R300 JOG positioning operation start pulse R301 i JOG positioning operation complete R302 Position control start input R31 F F Fulse output instruction flag R9120 Data table Data register Setting item Unit Example of sample program Settable range No H1011 0000 DT300 Control code JOG positioning Type 1 oe ee ae PONOR GANE CW CCW page Initial speed Hz DT304 __ Target speed 1 Hz DT306__ Acceleration time ms DT308_ Target speed 2 Hz DT310 Changeover time ms K100 K1 to K32760 DT312 Deceleration time ms K300 K1 to K32760 K 2 147 483 648 to K DT314 Target value pulses K100000 2 147 483 647 Note 1 Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers 2 For the type 1 of JOG positioning control instruction the time from the initial speed to the target speed 1 is specified as acceleration time the time from the target speed 1 to the target speed 2 is as changeover time and the time from the target speed 2 to the initial speed is as deceleration time For the details refer to 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions 8 46 Sample program
100. 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later and FP 32k type 15 46 15 3 Table of High level Instructions FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected For the FPO FPOR FPX FP X the P type high level instructions are not available lean rand E eon date mstructions Soe ede PEE a FE lial Eaa Ka move PDMV n Erie FEAE invert and PMV move 32 bit data DMV Be Pele move Reading of GETS The head word No of the specified slot is head word PGETS read No of the ec eee specified slot Bit data BIM The specified one bit i in S is transferred to speci
101. 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 3 This instruction is available for FP Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 15 55 High speed counter output reset with channel specification Positioning control with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification PWM output with channel specification 200 O d Description lean paran p Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S i FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S Outputs a pulse from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S Performs PWM output from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S S n PLS S n WM Jn High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPOR High speed counter and Pulse output controls Change and read of the elapsed value of high speed counter and Pulse output Target value much on with channel specification High speed counter control Pulse output control Target value much off with channel specification High speed counter control
102. 182 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact pf 8 825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 16 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact in daia pe 5s parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 82 compels Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR ps 2 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in ip S82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in pf S82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in ptr 52 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt 82 or S1 S2 Available X Not available Not available partially data compare 15 44 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH H o 32 bit as Hr a s2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 caa H 2 ia S2 1 2 compare hall nessi 9 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32
103. 2 TMX 0 K3 Control code 10 Fixed Control assignment 0 Data table control 000 Fixed m Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental 1 Absolute Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Precautions during programming When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output an operation similar to the forced stop is performed and the pulse output stops immediately 8 50 8 4 16 Linear Interpolation Control Instruction F175 The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table Specify the number KO or K2 corresponding to the channel CHO or CH2 assigned to the X axis to execute the F175 instruction Time chart Acceleration time Deceleration time 300ms 300ms Frequency Target speed 10kHz Initial speed 1kHz Time Linear interpolation operation start R50 Linear interpolation operation running R50 Linear interpolation operation start pulse R501 Linear interpolation operation complete R504 Pulse output instruction flag R9120 X axis R9121 Y axis Data table Data register Setting item Unit Example of sample program No H1000 0000 DT500 Control code Increment H eee ponmnen code CW CCW aaa DT502 Composite speed Initial K500 K6 to K50000 speed Hz prso4 Composite speed
104. 32C RS485 RS232C AFPORC14RS AFPORC14RM AFPORC14CRS AFPORC14MRS AFPORC14CRM AFPORC16T AFPORC16P RS232C AFPORC16CT RS232C AFPORC16CP RS485 RS485 AFPORC16MT AFPORC16MP AFPORC32T AFPORC32P RS232C AFPORC32CT RS232C AFPORC32CP RS485 RS485 AFPORC32MT AFPORC32MP 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 points 24V DC common 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 points 24V DC common Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A Transistor output NPN 0 2A Transistor output PNP 0 2A RS232C MIL RS232C RS485 RS485 connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector AFPORT32CT AFPORT32CP AFPORT32MT AFPORF32CT AFPORF32CP AFPORF32MT AFPORF32MP AFPORT32MP 1 3 FPO Expansion Units FPOR E8 Expansion Unit FPOR E16 Expansion unit FPOR E32 Expansion unit 1 4 Specifications Relay output 2A No of I O points 8 points 24V DC Input 8 points common a H oints cee ee une i DC common Output 4 points Connection ty MIL connector Terminal block Molex connector Product No AFPORE8X AFPORE8RS AFPORE8RM 8 points 24V Relay output Terminal Transistor 8 points output NPN Output 8 points Transistor 8 points
105. 3F nie to X5F WY2 WY4 a to Y2F a to Y4F oeo to X2F oo to X4F FPO D A conversion unit ie to Y2F oe to Y4F Output 16 points WY3 WY5 CH1 3 Y30 to Y3F Y50 to Y5F X20 to X3F X40 to X5F cee ane i Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F The data for the each channels of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TC4 FP0 TC8 and FPO D A conversion unit FPO A04V FPO A041 is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual 4 4 Chapter 5 Installation and Wiring 5 1 Installation 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use the unit in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any othe
106. 4 5 A or less common N Output points per common Lifetime l Min 100 000 operations Surge absorber None Operating mode indicator LED display Note Resistance load Internal circuit diagram Int rnal circurt Transistor type output specifications NPN output type E8YT E16YT E16T E32T PNP output type E8YP E16YP E16P E32P NPN PNP Output points per common 100 pAorless S Off state leakage current 100 uA or less On state voltage drop 1 5V or less External power Voltage 21 6 V DC to 26 4 V DC ly f ivi PSPP or SEVING Current 3 MA 1 point internal circuit ON OFF Note The above table shows the specifications of FPOR expansion unit For FPO Expansion Unit the maximum load current is 0 1 A 3 5 Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature E32 t24 VDC 16 K a 26 4 V DC Number Of 43 f ae kaa poina per ay bees besis common o which are simulta neous on 43 496 55 Ambient Temperature C Internal circuit diagram NPN th 7 LED AA LHF EDIT ABH E 424VDC BRR 5 24 VDC ie 10 28 St lt i UMM 3 6 PNP HDRRLD 7 AA BF BHRR ENEE 24V DC 3 4 Terminal layout diagram E8RS E8RM JE i Imi HHH 3 7 a
107. 52 FO MV H 100 DT90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 Example 2 Performing the deceleration stop of pulse output For CHO For CH1 x7 x8 HDF FO MV H 120 DT90052 HDF F0 MV H1120 DT90052 FO MV H 100 DT90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 Note Performing a forced stop may cause the elapsed value at the PLC output side to differ from the elapsed value at the motor input side Therefore you must execute a home return after pulse output has stopped When executing the forced stop pulse output stop with the pulse output control instruction FO the operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the pulse output is immediately stopped When the forced stop request flag bit3 of DT90052 is on instructions cannot be executed When executing the deceleration stop with the pulse output control instruction FO the operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the deceleration operation starts When the deceleration stop request flag bit5 of DT90052 is on instructions cannot be executed As for the data table control instruction F174 the operation is similar to that of the forced stop After the execution of the forced stop or deceleration stop pulses are not output unless the execution condition of each pulse output instruction F171 to F177 changes from OFF to ON 8 26 8 4 6 Elapsed Value Read and Write F1 Instruction Elapsed value read and write instruction F1 This
108. 8 data power data square root S1 S1 1 S1 S2 1 2 gt D 1 S2 D D V S 1 S gt D 1 D Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by S 1 S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Q Available lt Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later O FP2SH FP10SH O gt O O O O 10 O O oO 5 GA BA EA G W 0 C 15 63 Boolean Description rand FPO FP e p O a FPX FP2SH FP10SH FIX PFIX Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 32 bit intege
109. 90058 Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction DF or by changing H8000 to HOOOO Example showing the date and time being written Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on EEE e e e DF H Fo MV HO DT 90054 ia ad Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds o Fo mv H512 DT90055 Inputs 12th hour 5th day J Fo mv H8000 _ DT 90058 f Setthetime o C a al Note As the value is unstable in the initial state write the value using a programming tool As a day of the week is not automatically set on programming tools fix what day is set to 00 and set the value for 00 Example showing the clock calendar being used Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here the clock calendar function is used to output YO signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the Hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time R9010 ee Feo cmp DT90053 H830 f Data comparison instruction l 1 The value of the special data register DT90053 Hour 1 minute data is compared with the value of H830 8 8 30 J R900B RO I SS E tS S r Comparison match is output o RO TO YO ee a DF r Appointed time output pulse 1 second o J YO SS TMX 0 K410 jor second type timer Kt 0 is set and used as a 1 second type timer The hour data is stored in the upp
110. AFP07943 ARCT1F380 This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the computer link function for connecting to a host AFP15402 computer via C NET It comes with a 30 cm FPO ne port cable A power supply is not required ARCTIF96 This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of 100 to AFP8536 the computer link function for connecting to a 240V AC network connected PLC via C NET from a host AV DC AFP9532 computer Connected with FP series PLCs it conducts Ethernet communication sends e mail and displays the PLC data on HTML pages FP WEB2 AFP0611 ARCT1F446 1 1 4 Power Supply Unit Productname Specifications PartNo Product No Inout voltage 100 to 240 VAC Free input FPO Power supply unit P g P FPO PSA4 AFP0634 Output capacity 0 7A 24 V DC 1 1 5 Options and Repair Parts Product name Product No Data clear type AFP8670 FP Memory loader Data hold type AFP8671 Terminal screwdriver Relay output type Necessary when wiring terminal blocks Phoenix AFP0806 Molex connector pressure Necessary when wiring relay output type and Molex connectors AFP0805 contact tool MOLEX 57189 5000 Multi wire connector ve Necessary when wiring transistor output type connectors AXY52000FP pressure contact tool FPO Slim tyoe mountin Mounting plate for mounting control unit or exoansion unit on a panel 4 3 Ai 9 P p AFP0803 10 pack plate vertically FPO Flat type mounting plate Mounting plate for moun
111. Bee A 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The Fo Mv H 0 DT90052 count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed In case of CH1 X7 LY DF Fo MV H 1001 DT90052 N FO MV H 1000 DT90052 High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FPOR 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 DT90052 iI it T Channel specification HO to H5 CHO toCH5 HO Fixed HSC HO Fixed Clear high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear i Note Reset input setting 0 Available 1 Not available Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset No 1 Yes High speed counter control flag monitor area e The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90370 to DT90375 Note In the reset input setting the reset input allocated in the high speed counter setting of the system registers are defined to enable disable CHO CHt CH2 CH3 DT90373 CH4 DT90374 CH5 DT90375 Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e This instruction writes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter e Specify this instruction together with the elapsed value area of high speed counter after the special data register DT90300 e f the F1 DMV instruction is executed specifying DT90300 the e
112. COM port use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact Co Product No 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 Part No SZS 0 4x2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 Nem 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less Notes for wiring Do not twist the wires to connect them ok WD When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construction if the wire is fastened upon counter clockwise rotation of the screw the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clockwise 5 7 2 Connection of COM Port RS485 Type Wiring should extend from one unit to the next between terminals and terminals as below Never run two wires from a single unit to two other units In the unit that serves as the terminal station connect the E terminal and terminal e ee e E SRG SRG SRG 5 a a a a i a a gt a gt Short circuit the transmission line and terminal E of the terminal unit 5 7 3 Selection of Transmission Cables RS485 Type Please use the following cables as transmission cables Appropriate electrical cables a cables Conductor _ Cross sectional Resist zampe i Thick i appropriate ata ues
113. Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator Setting disable Header Setting disable No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port For using the RS485 type make the same setting as that of the baud rate switches 19200 or 115200 bps USB port The setting for the USB port is fixed The setting for the communication parameter is not available 7 4 4 1 1 Communication MEWTOCOL Slave Function Overview For a 1 1 computer link between the FPOR and a computer and RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Computer FPOR Command message e Response message Gap a ote RS232C System register settings Name _ sdSetvalue gt Computer link Char bit 7 bits 8 bits None Odd Even 1 bit 2 bit CR Note The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer Programming of computer link For a computer link a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side No comm
114. D F240 Bit line to bit COLM S n The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit n of D to DC 15 conversion Bit column to bit LINE S n The values of bit n of S to S 15 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits O to 15 of D Binary data gt BTOA 1 Converts multiple binary data to conversion D EZ r Alolx x DEDE O 7 4 k l S1 Checks the ASCII data strings to be S2 n used in F251 ATOB instruction i oO NO NO E ASCII data ACHK check Character strings instructions Comparing character F257 P257 SCMP S1 These instructions compare two specified character strings and YM NO ro strings output the judgment results to a special internal relay F258 S1 These instructions couple one P258 coupling S2 D character string with another set a Number of LEN S D These instructions determine the xlo characters in a number of characters in a character x O character string string F260 Search for SSRC S1 The specified character is searched K S2 D in a character string S1 2 D P260 character string Retrieving data from character strings right side Retrieving data from character strings left side Retrieving a character string from a character string i i RIGHT These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the right side of the character string LEFT These ins
115. D S1 S2 When S1 gt S3 S8 S1 D P287 control PBAND S3 D When S2 lt S3 S3 S2 D 16 bit data When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 0D F288 Deadband DBAND S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S34 1 S3 S3 1 P288 control PDBAND S3 D S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 D 1 D E Zone control Pze S S2 When S3 lt 0 S3 S1 D When 3350 on When S3 gt 0 S3 S2 D bial Zone control S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 S3 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE S3 D S 3 S1 1 S 1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions A P300 operation PBSIN BCD type BCOS S D COS S1 1 S1 D 1 D operation BCD type BTAN S D TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D operation BCD type BASIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D Ege eee operation F304 BCD type BACOS S D COS S1 1 1 gt D 1 D P304 arccosine PBACOS operation BCD type BAT AN TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D arctangent PBATAN operation Floating point type real number operation instructions F309 Floating point FMV S 1 S gt D 1 D E move Floating point F S2 S141 1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D type data PF addition bil La al ee elile type data subtraction kaikam Cal aaan ECOC type data PF D multiplication P Floating point S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 g
116. Deceleration time time time Execution condition Position control start input Pulse output instruction flag alll Note When the position control start input does not turn on the pulse output will not stop Create a program to stop the operation when an error occurs with a combination of the forced stop by the FO instruction bit 3 of DT90052 and the deceleration stop by the FO instruction bit 5 of DI90052 As for the position control start input only the leading edge is detected When the pulse number from turning on the position control start input until stopping is small relative to a specified deceleration time the operation stops before decelerating to the initial soeed When it is large relative to a specified deceleration time deceleration starts after holding the target speed Performing rewriting during RUN stops the pulse output When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed When the position control start input turns on in the acceleration area the deceleration stop is performed 8 43 Sample program JOG positioning operation Type 0 When the trigger execution condition is on the JOG operation is started When the position control start input turns on a specified pulse is output and the deceleration stop is performed Time chart Acceleration time Deceleration time Frequency domes Asime BOKHZ
117. Input connector 3 Input indicator LED 2 Output connector Output indicator LEDs 6 Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units 7 Expansion connector This connector is used to connect an expansion unit and internal circuit 8 DIN hook This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch It is also used to install the unit on the slim type mounting plate AFP0803 3 3 3 3 Input and Output Specifications 1 Input specifications Po tem iL Specifications Input point per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common 4 points common terminal Max off voltage Max off current Note The above table shows the specifications of FPOR Expansion Unit For FPO Expansion Unit the rated input voltage is approx 4 3 mA and the input impedance is approx 5 6 kQ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature E32 t24V DC 16 ar i K a 26 4 V DC Number Of 43 f n n rete th points per 44 common which are simulta neous on 43 406 55 Ambient Temperature C Internal circuit diagram Xn CON R1 5 1 KQ R2 9100 3 4 2 Output specifications Relay type output specifications E8RS E8RM E8YRS E16RS E16RM O ttem i escription Cs 2 A 250 V AC 2 A 30 V DC Max
118. Lilt OFF X4 X7 Count 0 1 2 o net n ae Decrement input CCW ON wo J LJ LI Laed LJ op X3 X6 a FLA LA ILL LE Lor OFF X4 X7 o Decremental input mode ON xo FLELFLE L FOUL LE or X1 X3 X4 X6 X7 Count n 9 1 n 2 n 3 n 3 2 1 0 o gt Incremental decremental input mode XO f f f f F f F ON X3 X6 i Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing o Direction discrimination i J 7 J F 7 7 7 7 ON X3 X6 ial l ON A Cee X X4 X7 Count o 2 3 4 20 0 e Increasing Decreasing 8 9 Count for reset input Incremental input mode XO or X1 ON og orxay d LE LE LE LE LE LAL Lore X2 X5 oble o file fef count is prohibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 8 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required lt Single phase gt lt Two phase gt l i l i elam E E 2 2 l l l l l l l lo o l 4 4 4 4 8 10 8 3 4 I O Allocation e As shown in the table in the previous section 8 2 1 the inputs and outputs used will differ dep
119. M Modem Enabled i Stop Bit fi 4 4 4 Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Click on Y and select MODBUS RTU link No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator Setting disable Header Setting disable No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port For using the RS485 type make the same setting as that of the baud rate switches 19200 or 115200 bps 7 52 7 7 3 MODBUS Master Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MODBUS master function Sample program Sets the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing 0 words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 ge FO MV H2 DT100 7 Fo MV H1001 DT101 e J FO MV HO WRO 1 F1 DMV HO _DT50 O F1 DMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31F R2
120. N Transmitted data 1 3 2 3 or j r j S Stored Receive buffer A A p E E B B B F D C D Number of bytes lt 4 gt lt gt lt 0 gt lt i gt lt I gt received Write pointer Number of bytes received is cleared when F159 MTRN v instruction is executed For general purpose serial communication half duplex transmission must be used Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 is on When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Also when F159 MTRN is executed the error flag R9037 the reception done flag R9038 and the transmission done flag R9039 goes off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 must be observed Reception stops if the error flag R9037 goes on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction which turns off the error flag cS Cod note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program 7 25 Header STX Terminator ETX Receiving data
121. Operation start signal Inverter operation signal Positioning operation start Positioning done pulse High speed counter CHO control flag Positioning operation running Number of pulse SSS S35 I Program When X85 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops AS R9110 R102 R100 E La Positioning operations start da e S e enim ai E ne meal Sl M a o mca e e e e e e e e oF e Fi omv Ko DT90300 ee ee ee Fi67HCIR KO KS5000 YO Target value match off instruction _ 1 YO goes off when elapsed value of high Sets high speed counter CHO _ _speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses r Set the inverter operation signal YO lg ee erg r Positioning done pulse 0 5 s be s type timer lt Z Setting K5 and using it as a 0 5 s timer ee OUl l iIi 8 16 Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example FPOR Input termial Encoder input Operation start Inverter operation Inverter high speed Operation chart Speed 0 4500 5000 Number of pulse i i Inverter Operation Stop Fast Slow I O allocation R100 Positioning operation running Conveyor R101 _ Positioning operation start R102 __ Arrival at deceleration point R103 _ Positioning done pulse
122. P2101 USB to UART Bridge Controller This wizard helps you install software for CP210x USB Composite Device device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue For Windows 7 although the following window appears it will automatically disappear after a short time The driver is not installed ie Installing device driver software Click here for status j Device driver software was not successfully installed Click here for details Restrictions on USB Communication e The FPOR connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM port When multiple FPOR units are connected to one PC with the USB they cannot communicate with the PC simultaneously e The PC can communicate with the FPOR that was connected first only and it cannot communicate with the other FPOR e A USB HUB cannot be used for the connection 6 1 2 Installation of USB Driver USB drivers must be installed to connect the unit with the USB The installation procedures differ depending on the OS in the PC to be used IEF Note For the PC with more than one connector it may be requested to reinstall these two drivers if the positions of the USB connectors are changed In that case reinst
123. PC PLC Link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula T max Tsi1 Ts2 Tsn Tit Tso Tik ob TIk link addition processing time Ts transmission time per station TSO master station scan time Tit link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time Tpc PC PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx sending time per byte x Pem PLC link sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Pem 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 2 Tit link table sending time Tit Ttx Sending time per byte x Ltm link table sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Ltm 13 2x n n number of stations being added Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool Tik link addition processing time If no stations are being added Tlk 0 TIk Tic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis Sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs Tso master station scan time Tic 10 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt Initial value 400 ms can be changed using SYS1 system register in
124. Pulse output control Pulse output JOG positioning type 0 1 Trapezoidal control Pulse output JOG operation 0 and 1 PWM output with channel specification 15 56 Cam control CAMO S Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Controls cam operation on off patterns of each cam output according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the high speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S S DT90052 S DT90300 DT90300 D n n Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the high speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance e k n with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S FP2SH FP10SH z e i F174 Pulse output Outputs the pulses from the Selectabl
125. RTU Function overview The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FPOR and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit Communication is performed when the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave unit returns responses response messages according to the instructions Master function Master Slave Slave Slave Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Slave function Slave function Slave function applicable applicable applicable device device device Slave function Master Modbus RTU Slave Slave Slave Master function device FPOR 1 3 7 2 Communicaton Port Type 7 2 1 Tool Port This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commie mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit Pin No Signalname Abbreviation Signal direction Signal Ground SG _ po o ooo 2 Send Data SD Uni External device 3 Receive Data RD Unit External device Not used m Unit External device 7 2 2 USB Port This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial USB2 0 cable A miniB can be used USB2 0 USB miniB type Note The USB driver should be installed It is assigned to a g virtual COM port on the PC Select RS232C C NET ina programming tool 00000000 000 7 2 3 COM Port It is a screw down connection type
126. S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact se aia serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the AND comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ANF gt Connects a Form A on ally ao contact _ gt 81 S serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 w Connects a Form A normally open contact F lt SI 52 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ANF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact Floating point type real number data compare OR serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the ol comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S24 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in ORF lt gt Pers 82 5 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ORF gt _pP st 82 5 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the ORF lt m Fe 81 52 comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14
127. Specify the value to match the connected external device No 414 Baud rate setting Select one of the values from 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps No 415 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 417 Starting address for data received No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received For the general purpose serial communication setting Receive buffer is required To change this area specify the starting address using system register No 417 and the volume number of words using No 418 The receive buffer layout is shown below Receive buffer The number of received bytes is stored here The number of words is Received data specified in system regis Starting area specified in system register no 41r I storage area ter no 418 EJ Starting address for data received C10 C14 C16 DTO to DT 1659 C32 DTO to DT6143 T32 DTO to DT16383 Default Tool port DT4096 COM RS232C port DTO Buffer capacity setting for data received C10 C14 C16 0 to 1660 words Default 1660 words C32 0 to 6144 words Default 6144 words T32 0 to 16384 words Default 16384 words 7 33 7 6 PC PLC link Function 7 6 1 Overview A system can be configured for the PC PLC link MEWNET W0O with the FPOR Exclusive internal relays link relays L and data registers link registers LD are shared between the connected PLCs Turning on a link relay conta
128. T EEL LEE DT90052 w F _ a Forch3 Forch2 Forcht For chd ch specification area Control code Control codes for each ch The addresses of the following special data registers are changed Elapsed value of high speed counter CHO to CH3 FPOR FPO gt DT90300 DT90301 DT9044 DT90044 DT9045 DT90045 gt DT90304 DT90305 DT9048 DT90048 DT9049 DT90049 DT90308 DT90309 DT9104 DT90104 DT9105 DT90105 gt DT90312 DT90313 DT9108 DT90108 DT9109 DT90109 Target value of high speed counter CHO to CH3 FPO FPOR DT9046 DT90046 DT9047 DT 90047 DT90302 DT90303 DT9050 DT90050 DT9051 DT90051 DT90306 DT90307 DT9106 DT90106 DT9107 DT90107 DT90310 DT9031 1 DT9110 DT90110 DT9111 DT90111 gt DT90314 DT90315 Note The numbers in parentheses are for FPO T32 When using the FPOR in the same specifications as FPO The FPOR supports an operation mode FPO compatibility mode Using this mode enables to use the programs of the FPO as they are In the FPO compatibility mode the programs except some programs can operate with the same specifications as the FPO Note The FPO compatibility mode is not available for the F32 type The speed of arithmetic processing in the FPO compatibility mode is the same as the FPOR so the timing for processing the program may differ from the original timing for the FPO program If you want to execute the program in the condition close to the original timing
129. T90018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FR2SH FP10SH Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available 15 75 Opera tion status Remote I O commu nication error MEW NET F attribute error Expansion unit power supply sequence error battery error Description and steps to take FPS FP X S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO MEW NET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the unit on the slave station an abnormality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was d
130. The same message as a command is returned for single write command A part of a command message 6 bytes from the beginning is returned for multiple write command Response in abnormal status In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command except transmission error Slave address unit number Function code 80H One of either 1 2 or 3 Error code CRC Error code contents 1 Function code error 2 Device number error out of range 3 Device quantity error out of range Reception done judgment time The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned below has passed after the final data was received Approx 1 7 ms Approx 0 8 ms Approx 0 6 ms Approx 0 3 ms Note The reception done judgment time is an approx 32 bit time 7 50 Supported commands 5 yecute s Name MODBUS Remarks instructions for a Name for FPOR mastei decimal original Reference No F146 RECV Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils F146 RECV Read Input Status Read X Input F146 RECV Read Holding Registers Read DT F146 RECV Read Input Registers Read WL and LD F145 SEND Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 5 7 i 2 Cannot be issued Loopback Test F145 SEND 1 Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys and Rs F145 SEND 1 Preset Multiple Registers Write DT Multiple Words Cannot be issued 2 Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask Cannot be issued
131. UN is performed Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms Operation during rewrite 1 External output Y is held 2 External input X is ignored 3 The timer T stops the clock 4 Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right sift registers are ignored 5 Interrupt functions are stopped 6 Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped 7 Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set values for timer counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed value area EV do not change Operation of rewrite during RUN complete flag The rewrite during RUN complete flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program 12 10 12 5 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is Not Possible When the timeout error message is indicated Even if the timeout error message
132. a The following instructions that are supported on the FPO cannot be used Replace them with the instructions for the FPOR based on the following description FPO FPOR F144 TRNS instruction F159 MTRN instruction F168 SPD1 instruction F171 SPDH F177 HOME instructions F169 PLS instruction F172 PLSH instruction F170 PWM instruction F173 PWMH instruction As for the following instructions the specifications change Modify the programs in accordance with the specifications after the change FPO FPOR F12 ICRD instruction Unit of read 64 words Unit of read 2048 words P13 PICWT instruction Unit of write 64 words Unit of write 2048 words The addresses of the following special internal relays are changed High speed counter control flag FPO FPOR R903A For CHO R9110 For CHO R903B For CH1 R9111 For CH1 R903C For CH2 R9112 For CH2 R903D For CH3 R9113 For CH3 The contents of the following special data registers are changed FPO FPOR DT9052 DT90052 DT90052 High speed counter control flag High speed counter control flag As each 4 bits of the control code for all 4 As the areas to write the channel channels are allocated write the control code numbers to be changed and the in the area of the corresponding channel control codes are separated write the corresponding channel numbers and control codes bitlS 12 11 ay 4 J bit15 12 11 a7 4 0 LDTSs082 oraoosa LE
133. a tion condi tions setting Password setting Interrupt setting PLC link time setting H Lino sysi m MEWTOCOL COM response control High speed counter operation mode changing System registers No 40 to No 47 changing H H svs2 5 DI oH Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the operation mode of the high speed counter based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH QO Available Not available A Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With FP 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 3 With FP 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used 15 43 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH l Oo Data l Data compare instructions instructions
134. a high level instruction is executed When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on The operation error code E45 is set at special data register DT90000 The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 Types of operation error 1 Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used 2 BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range 3 Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified data is outside the possible range 4 Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 11 3 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs When you set system register 26 to continuation the control unit operates even if an operation error Occurs Using FPWIN GR 1 Set the mode of the CPU to RPOG 2 Select the Option in PLC Configuration option from the menu bar 3 On the PLC Configuration menu select Action on error This displays system registers 20 to 26 4 Remove the check of system register 26 5 Press the OK to write the setting to the PLC Us
135. acter ASCII code PASC constants of S are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 F96 16 bit table data S1 The data of S1 is searched for in P96 search PSRC S2 the areas in the range S2 to S3 S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 DSRC S1 The data of S1 1 S1 is searched PDSRC S2 for in the 32 bit data designated by 3 S3 beginning from S2 and the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 F97 P97 32 bit table data search w JJ O Data shift instructions Data table shift out and compress CMPR D1 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of PCMPR D2 the data between D1 and D2 that D3 are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F99 P99 Data table shift in CMPW S D1 and compress PCMP Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F100 Right shift of P100 multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data Left shift of multiple SHL bits n bits in a 16 PSHL bit data F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR P102 in a 32 bit data PDSHR F103 Left shift of n bits in DSHL P103 a 32 bit data PDSHL D n Shifts the n bits of D to the right D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right D
136. ailable for the COM port only Sample program Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing oH words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 Ter MV H2 DT100 J Fo MV H 1001 DT101 e J Fo mv HO WRO J FiDMV HO _DT50 FiDMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31F 2 is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 RO R2 H H Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 _ F61DCMP DT50 DT60 R1 R900B 49 4 aa 1 1 F36 D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and SSF DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port R1 F145 SEND DT 100 DT50 DTO KO FO MV H1 WRO J 70 Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO DT60 Fo MV HO WRO 7 7 15 Flowchart Data initialization DT50 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 YES Increments DT50 and DT51 sends a data write command Comp
137. all the drivers Procedure of installing the driver e g Windows XP 1 Once the FPOR is connected the following screen is displayed Select No not this time and click Next gt Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device Click Next to continue 6 3 2 Select Install from a list of specific location and click Next gt Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for FPOR If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue 3 Select Search for the best driver in these locations and check Include this location in the search Then click the Browse button to specify the folder that the USB driver of FPOR has been stored and click Next gt Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Na Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default searc
138. allation dimension Approx 100 10 60_ N Ld Unit mm Note As for the expansion unit refer to the dimensions only Target expansion units E8RS E16RS 14 2 14 1 2 C10 C14 Control Unit Molex Connector E FPORC10CRM 14CRM_ W FPORC10RM 14RM E When mounting Molex connector and power supply cable Max installation dimension Approx 90 Unit mm Note As for the expansion unit refer to the dimensions only Target expansion units E8RM E16RM 14 1 3 C16 Control Unit MIL Connector E FPORC16CT P E FPORCI6T P WE When mounting MIL connector and power supply cable Max installation dimension Approx 100 18 60 aL D 3 3 p e a Hli ern S 13 40 Approx 60 Unit mm Note As for the expansion unit refer to the dimensions only Target expansion units E16X E16YT E16YP E16T E16P E8X E8YT E8YP 14 4 14 1 4 C32 T32 F32 Control Unit MIL Connector E FPORC32CT P E FPORC32T P FPORT32CT P FPORF32CT P When mounting MIL connector and power supply cable Max instalation dimension Approx 100 Unit mm Note As for the expansion unit refer to the dimensions only Target FPO expansion units E32T E32P 14 5 14 1 5 Power Supply Unit WE Power supply unit FPO PSA4 35 0 90 0 Unit mm 14 1 6 I O Link Unit E 1 0 link unit AFP0732 Unit mm Unit mm 14 6 14 2 Cable Adapter Specifications
139. ame network Link relay Link relay LO for unit no 1 is turned on The status change is fed back to the programs of the other units and YO of the other units is set to TRUE a H No 3 Link register 777 No 4 Link register 777 oo ta oo No 2 Link register i RO ro MV K100 LOO No 1 Link register LD 100 Link register A constant of 100 is written to link register LDO of unit no 1 The contents of LDO in the other units are also changed to a constant of 100 Communication port It is available for the COM port only 7 35 7 6 2 Setting of Unit Numbers By default the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers In a PC PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register Note1 The priority order for unit number settings is as follows 1 SYS1 instruction 2 System registers Note2 Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer Notes If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 Dp gg FPOR FPOR FPOR FPOR Max 16 units on eune Unit no
140. ams and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read the data of the PLC in which the program upload protection has been set Keeping your programs is your responsibility 9 2 2 Setting Method Use the programming tool to set the upload protection on the control unit Upload protection setting with FPWIN GR 1 Select Online gt Online Edit Mode in the menu bar and press the CTRL and F2 keys The screen is switched to Online Monitor 2 Select Tool gt Upload settings in the menu bar The Upload settings dialog box is displayed Upload settings Untitlel E x ee Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Close Release the upload protection by compulsion Help 3 Select Set the PLC cannot be uploaded and press the Execute button Force Cancel with FPWIN GR Select Release the upload protection by compulsion in the Upload settings dialog box and press the Execute button 9 8 9 3 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader 9 3 1 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader The following two functions of the FP memory loader AFP8670 AFP86 71 can be set through the FPOR Limited distribution function Programs can be downloaded only to the units which the same password has been set When downloading a program from the memory loader the program can be downloaded only when the pro
141. ance varies depending on the input terminal number Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch LED equipped Bleeder limit resistor switch Power supply for input r Internal resistor of limit switch k Q R Bleeder resistor kQ The off voltage of input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select the bleeder resistor R so that 24 2 4 The current will be greater than I e The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is RS 21 84 9 911 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor is _ Power supply voltage x 3 to 5 times R WwW If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the LED equipped limit switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown on the left 5 9 5 3 2 Output Wiring Protective circuit for inductive loads With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load When switching DC inductive loads with relay output be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load Relay output type Surge absorber R G Varistor 7 Ay _ h Output 4 g l Output ag ht Load uput g o FPOR terminal a FPOR terminal Load h COM 9 COM J Example of surge absorber Resistance R 50 amp Capacity C 0 47 uF When using an DC inductive load Diode gt Output 1 terminal 9 _Load m j FPOR COM J
142. and 50kHz as initial speed as speed change initial speed as speed speed table of 30 steps table of 30 steps Calculates the section between table of 30 steps initial speed and S0kHz as speed table of 30 steps i Target Decelerates with each step Msc lt 2 Target speed ___ pre In each section and ar Before speed with the same slope Accelerates with each Decelerates with each change aai dr z i step assigned between Step assigned between p Accelerate each step cones initial speed and target target speed and initial Initial gt e ta a speed speed speed ma AT 1 Targat value Target value Time Actual deceleration lime Actua acceleration time Position control start input S L JOG positioning control Type 1 F171 i Actual acceleration time i Speed change command L_ SS Time Actual deceleration time Position control start input Specify the time from the initial soeed to the target speed 1 as acceleration time the time from the target speed 1 to the target speed 2 as the changeover time and the time from the target speed 2 to the initial soeed as deceleration time in the program Each section between the initial speed and the target speed 1 between the target speed 1 and the target speed 2 and between the target speed 2 and the initial speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed Therefore the acceleration decel
143. ange for all the units Link register allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 N ona LD128 oO f k Send area gt gt 67 167 168 Receive area No 2 i lt j Receive area Receive area 208 308 No 3 i p Send area System registers mo ome OOOO e naa ieS Raa No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission o Link register transmission size 40 48 Note No 51 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations IES Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 7 40 Partial use of link areas In the link areas available for PC PLC link link relays with a total of 1024 points 64 words and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as
144. arget value Pulse output when Pulse output i i less than direction output is from CCW current value ON Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 8 21 8 4 3 I O Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method e Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW lt When using CH0 gt FPOR Home input X4 xo Near home input _ Driver CW output Y Y1 CCW output X0 or any other input can be specified for the near home input Single pulse input driver lt When using CH2 gt FPOR Home input 5 Xl Near home input P Driver CW output Y4 Y5 CCW output X1 or any other input can be specified for the near home input pulse input and directional switching input method e One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal d
145. avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a password is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point Programming Tool Restrictions Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units Type of programming tool Type of unit Used Ver 2 80 or later Windows software Used Conforms to IEC61131 3 prvi sole Ver 6 10 or later AFP1113V2 FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows software AFP1113 Satna Handy programming unit AFP1114 Discontinued product AFP1111A AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112 FP memory loader pita PE y AFP8671 Ver 2 0 or later Note In case of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 FPWIN GR Ver 2 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site FPWIN Pro Ver 6 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site The handy programming unit cannot be used Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FPOR using the handy programming unit http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list patch plc jsp vi When Using FPO Programs The programs used on the existing FPO can be used on the FPOR in the following 2 cases 1 Using the programs in the FPOR specifications It enables to make maximum use of the p
146. baud rate of 9600 or 19200 bps can be selected Specify the value to match the connected external device COM port RS232C port settings PUG Gost eur atin Unibet xj Nodi Prt Section E Ha d1 Correction Feral Hadid Emaka Chw be fess eno Paip Ches oa mj etisha Shap Bit Cr 06 COC SCO a z T Ma 408 Moder Ersahined I i E p fee tite _ No 412 Mode selection Select the computer link No 413 Communication Format Char Bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR Header STX not exist Change the value to match the connected external device No 414 Baud rate Select one of the values from 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps No 415 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 32 No 416 Modem enabled Check the box to connect a modem 7 17 7 5 General purpose Serial Communication 7 5 1 Overview In general purpose serial communication data is sent and received over the communication port to and from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the communication port by means of an FPOR program and the FPOR data registers Image processing device Sending data using F159 MTRN Data is sent by transferring the data to a data register and then transmitting it using the F159 MTRN instruction j R
147. ch are simulta 4 neous on Ambient Temperature C Circuit diagram Internal circuit 3 R1 9 1 KO R2 1 kQ 2 4 2 2 2 Output Specifications Transistor output specifications po NPN Insulation method Output type Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Max load current For C32 T32 F32 16 points common Off state leakage current On state voltage drop Response time 0 1 ms or less Load current 0 5 mA or more ON OFF 40 us or less Load current 5 mA or more eo Toemeortstoadamekosmaemere External power supply Current C16 30 mA or less C16 35 mA or less Zener diode S O Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature T32 at 24 V DC Fi Y Cat 26 4V DC 7 Number of NI EAn A Lm points per common which are simulta 4 neous on 5 Ambient Temperature C Circuit diagram NPN PNP SS Ss e SSS Se a Output indicator LED Output indicator LED AA d terminal LZ terminal J External ae Outupt terminal External l Outupt terminal power o o Loadh power e l r S nad supply 5 E Load supply D 3 T Load 5 ajr an Loy 24V DC 3 lB power EE spe Te 2av00 sR se pr
148. ck on the Settings button Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Unprotect 4 digits or 8 digits Input the set password Once the cancellation of protection is completed the following message is displayed FPWIN GR x IN The protect of PLG was released 3 Click the OK button IES Note Unless the access is permitted the cancellation of password cannot be executed 9 6 How to force cancel Programs and security information are all deleted 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is ee ios Set PLG Password Untitlel X Current statuz a digits Protect Close Available retry counte 3 counts A digit number Be Help i 4 digits Hex f 8 digits alphanurmeric Match case Operation Mode f Access f Protect 8 digits password E Enter in alphanumeric ika Setting for FP memoar loader option T Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 2 Click the Force Cancel button A confirmation message is displayed 3 Confirm the message and click the OK button If the current status is Password is not set this procedure has completed All programs and security information were deleted Set PLG Password Untitle a Current status gt Password ts not set Close Available retry counts 3 counts eea digit number
149. communication Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist STX exist Communication 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps speed Baud rate 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps setting 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data G1ag2104 communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data 417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note1 The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings Data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Note2 The general purpose communication with the tool port is available only in RUN mode In PROG mode the computer link mode must be used regardless of settings Data lenght icati bit 8 bits Communication l format setting Ra check Stop bit 1 bit 15 8 FPOR sous Default Description ress value p Controller input time constant setting 1 X0 to X3 co Controller input time constant setting 1 X4 to X7 Controller input time iine constant setting 2 X8 to XB C32 T32 F32 Controller input time constant setting 2 XC to XF C32 T32 F32 Note X6 and X7 is invalid for C10 15 9 15 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FPOR The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The on and off states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instructi
150. contact area Write contact area Remote control 7 4 3 Setting Communication Parameters Tool port COM port The settings for baud rate and communication format are entered using a programming tool Note When the MEWTOCOL master is used also select Computer Link COM port only Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click Tool Port or COM Port from the left list Dialog box of PLC system register setting Tool port selection screen PLC Configuration Untitlel Hald Mon hold Action on Error T Mo 43 Communication Format Time No410 Unit No Link WO 0 No412 Comm Mode Char Bit e Bits Link 0 1 me oa Sts Controller input settings HSC Computer Link Parity Udd Controller output settings PLS t Modem Enabled E Stop Bit fi Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Terminator cA Time constant setting of CPU input STs notewsh lt T No415 Baudrate a600 bps Nostell Stating address tor date re cerned of DT 4096 i 123141 senal data communication mode Hodal Buter capacity setting for data recenyed ot a fo 2046 seal data communication mode Cancel Fead PLC Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode Click Computer Link No 413
151. ct C Unprotect 8 digits password pa Enter in alphanumeric ea Setting for FP memory loader option T Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 2 Set the items in the table below and click on the Settings button Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Protect 4 digits or 8 digits Input a password to be set Set PLO Password Untitlel Enter the password in alphanumeric Frc Do not forget this password 3 Input the password for confirmation again and click the OK button Once the PLC is in write read inhibit state password protected the following message is displayed FPWIN GR im xi IN PL became disabled to writerread 4 Click the OK button 9 4 How to permit access with password 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed Set PLC Password Untitlel a x PLE Home Settings Curent status 2 Fassword is not set Close Available ret counts 3 counts Soe oneal r digit number ed Help C 4 digits Hex f A digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password aa Enter in alphanumeric ekak Setting for FP memory loader option T Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Set the items in the table below and clic
152. ct in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and the data of all units are updated at the same time Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 No 1 No 1 No 1 Send area j pree oe maa ad Receive area No 2 gt Receive area Receive area No 3 Send area gt gt FPOR FPOR FPOR The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs PLCs connectable to the PC link via MEWNET W0O FP2 Multi Communication Unit Using Communication cassette RS485 type FP X Using Communication cassette RS485 type FP Using Communication cassette RS485 type FPOR RS485 type 7 34 Operation of PLC link Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the s
153. d areas will be cleared to 0 when the power is turned on next time We recommend to add a program for clearing the data to 0 when the values in hold areas become indefinite Relation between charging time and backup time 100 t 50 days at 25 C 40 days at 25 C 30 days at 25 C Backup time Battery capacity recovery rate 10 days at 25 C Oo 8 16 24 45 Fa Charging time h Backup time When ambient temperature is 70 C 14 days When ambient temperature is 25 C 50 days When ambient temperature is 20 C 25 days Predicted backup life When ambient temperature is 55 C 430 days When ambient temperature is 45 C 1200 days When ambient temperature is 40 C 2100 days When ambient temperature is 35 C 3300 days When ambient temperature is 34 C or lower 10 years The temperature when the power is off has little influence on the battery life 7 Precision of Clock Calendar T32 only When ambient temperature is 0 C Less than 104 seconds per month When ambient temperature is 25 C Less than 51 seconds per month When ambient temperature is 55 C Less than 155 seconds per month 13 5 13 1 3 Communication Specifications Tool port C S Descrip Data length 7 bits 8 bits Transmission format Communication function Computer link Slave Modem initialization General purpose communication In the RUN mode only USB port i eseription Standard Baud rate USB2
154. d up to the target speed again When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed There are two kinds of control method which are type 0 and type 1 Operation modes of JOG operation There are two operation modes for the JOG operation which are type 0 and type 1 Those operation specifications for the specified target value differ Type 0 Regardless of the settings for the target value the JOG operation is performed when the trigger is on Pulse output instruction flag gt R9120 l Trigger i Time Deceleration stop starts when the trigger is off Deceleration stop starts when the trigger is off Type 1 Even if the trigger is on the deceleration stop is aie according to the settings of the target value Pulse output L instruction flag a R9120 Trigger Targe value Specified No of pulses Deceleration stop starts according to the settings of the target value 8 28 Sample program JOG operation Type 0 No target value The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from YO when using forward rotation and Y1 when using reverse rotation with the following conditions Initial soeed 1 kHz Target speed 7kHz Acceleration time 100 ms Deceleration time 1000 ms Timing chart Acceleration time Deceleration time Frequency 7 100ms 100ms Target speed 7kHz
155. de Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is in the RUN mode en Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is in the RUN mode MEWNET No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode WoO Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode PC PLC Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode link 1 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode operation Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode mode relay Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode ia Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode arte Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 12 Is in the RUN mode SA Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode MoA Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode ma Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode peal Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 Is in the RUN mode bag Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode A Available N A Not available 15 18 WR910 FPOR Relay ae HSC CHO HSC CH1 Turns on the channel of high speed counter during the High speed Face cya control using F165 CAMO F166 HC1S F167 HC1R R9110 R9111 one c
156. dge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Inverts the output condition on off each time the leading edge of the trigger is detected Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially A T R LGL F E ORt ik aka FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is T detected Pn I la Connects the multiple instruction blocks in T parallel Available gt Not JE T Not available partially The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 In the FP2 FP2SH 10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used 15 39 Stores the operated result up to this instruction 2 Read stack Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction 2 Pop stack Eo Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Lead
157. dyn Err Verifi Err Operation Err PC link We link VE link Help If the error is an operation error the error address can be confirmed in this dialog box To display the status display dialog box select Status Display under Online on the menu bar Using FPWIN Pro With the FPWIN Pro the contents of the self diagnostic error can be checked in the following PLC status dialog box Select PLC status under Monitor in the menu to display this dialog box PLC status dialog box PLG Status CPU Type FPOR 16k C10 C14 C16 Version 1 06 Connection Link Unit No Network Scan Time Current 0 4 ms Minimum 0 4 ms Maximum 0 6 ms PLC Status Information RUN Mode REMOTE Mode PROG Mode w TEST Mode BREAK Mode Break Enabled Output Enabled Step Mode Force Active PLC Message Interrupt Enabled PLC Message Station HOME PLC Memory Partitions Program Size Steps Basic Error Messages Self Diagnostic Error W Operation Error E First Error Step 17 gt 17 Task 1 17 gt 17 Task 1 Last Error Step Battery Error Battery Error hold Hardware Error Slot Status I O Verify Error Slot Status Intelligent Unit Error Slot Status Hardware Error TO Verify Error Intelligent Unit Error Self Diagnostic Error Error 45 Self Check Operation Error Procedure 2 lt For error code is 1 to 9 gt Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change t
158. e DT9016 DT9015 S1 X S2 D 2 result in 16 bits Ee E increment P 1 32 bit data D 1 F37 16 bit data P37 omen Pa F38 32 bit data ie D 1 D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D D 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 32 bit data multiplication s z D result in 32 bits Q Available X Not available Not available partially 15 48 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Boo ee IN Q _ i pre BCD arithmetic instructions re sume e Po ewe Teeth P40 data addition PB on e paren sen 7 efefofefeo P41 data addition PDB le Fa Seams fe Pee meme alalafelole data addition PB Paa ammodation pose oo O Sneen set it ol ofofololo data addition PDB as smeer pe 8 eepe subtraction 8 digit BCD data DB D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D fpas_ suptacton pos 0 f7 olofofololo rar lemon p fs of oofofolo subtraction pas_ swtacion pos e n ol ofofolola subtraction PDB Fe ee we eu samnanmane 1 ofo o multiplication mutpteston pos Deby ee multiplication PDB be D 1 S2 D S2 quotient D division PB a Sd DT9015 8 digit BCD data DB S1 S2 D S141 1 S2 1 S2 quotient division PDB D 1 D TE DT9016 DT9015 Eo praem felele increment PB 1 8 digit BCD data DB 1 D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D en elefefefe decrement aay 8 digit BCD data DB 1 D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D ii decrement PDB 1 Data compare ins
159. e data specified channel according to table control peration the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Performs the home return F176 Pulse output SPCH Circular interpolation according to the specified data F177 Pulse output Home return table F178 Input pulse PLS M S1 S2 D Measures the number of pulses measurement and cycle of pulses to be input No of pulses to the high speed counter of the cycle for input specified channel pulses a F175 Pulse output S n Pulses are output from channel Linear in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line 15 57 FP2SH FP10SH B200 O d Description lean peran p High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FP2 FP X High speed MV S DT90052 Performs high speed counter counter and and Pulse output controls Pulse output according to 5 a controls the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 F1 Change and read ree Transfers S 1 S to high of the elapsed S DT90044 speed counter and Pulse output 7 value of high FP X elapsed value area DT90045 speed counter S DT90300 DT90044 and Pulse output FPZ Transfers value in high speed DT90044 D counter and Pulse output n FP X elapsed value area DT90045 DT9030
160. e maximum volume of data that can be The maximum volume of data that can be received sent is 2048 bytes is 4094 bytes Key Point In the compatibility mode with the FPO FPO compatibility mode the F159 MTRN instruction is changed to the F144 TRNS instruction Communication Port Tool port COM port 7 18 7 5 2 Programming Example of General purpose Serial Communication The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified communication port F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent and received via the specified COM port RO S n D ee L eee H F159 MTRN DT100 K8 K1 ied dy Serial data communicat Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes are sent from the communication K1 port Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that can be specified for n WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD I0 to ID K H Devices that can be specified for D Only the K constants KO and K1 only Sending data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the communication port specified by D Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT 104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent
161. e of Type 0 without target value 0 Forward 1 Reverse In case of Type 1 without target values 0 Incremental 1 Absolute e Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Precautions during programming For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 Performing rewriting during RUN stops the pulse output 8 32 8 4 8 Home Return Instruction F177 When the trigger execution condition turns on the home return is performed according to a specified data table On the completion of the home return the elapsed value area is reset to 0 Operation modes of Home return operation There are two kinds of operation modes which are type 0 and type 1 Type 0 The home input is effective regardless of whether or not there is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Also the home return can be performed without the near home input Without near home input With near home input Home input ON Near home Home Po i input ON input ON Max speed Max speed Initial speed Initial speed 0 Hz OHz Home Input is effective at any time Home input ON during deceleration Near home Speed Input ON Home Max speed y input ON Initial speed OHz Type 1 In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near
162. e range of the data register depending on the data in I0 If the value exceeds the range an operation error will occur The same is true when the contents of 10 are a negative value 2 Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD lt BIN data conversion lt Example gt When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted RO F81 BIN DTO DT100 In this case if DTO contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result lt Example gt When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted RO _ F80 BCD DT1 DT101 In this case if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999 an operation error will occur 3 Check if the devisor of a division instruction is 0 lt Example gt RO F32 DTO DT100 DT200 In this case if the content of DT100 is 0 an operation error will occur 11 10 Chapter 12 Precautions During Programming 12 1 Use of Duplicated Output 12 1 1 Duplicated Output What is duplicated output Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a Sequence program If the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is considered to be duplicated output Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET RST instruction or high level instruction Such as data transfer it is not regarded as duplicated output If you enter RUN mode w
163. eceive buffer layout is shown below When setting for the tool port and the COM port both do not specify the same buffer number Receive buffer Starting area specified a The number of in system register no received bytes 416 420 is stored here The number of words is Received data specified in system regis storage area ter no 417 421 1 29 7 5 8 Connection with 1 1 Communication General purpose Serial Communication RS232C RS232C equipment System register settings No Name Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist Starting address for receive buffer C10 14 16 DTO to DT12314 en C32 T32 F32 DTO to DT32764 Default setting Tool port DT4096 COM port DTO No 417 Receive buffer capacity 0 to 2048 words Default setting 2048 words No 421 Note1 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed For using the RS485 type make the same setting as that of the baud rate switches 19200 or 115200 bps Note2 No 416 and 417 is the COM port No 420 and 421 is the tool port 7 30 7 5 9 1 N Communication General purpose Serial Commu
164. eceiving data Data is received by transferring the data from the communication port to the data register specified in the system register as the receive buffer and then being stored there automatically Printer Sending and receiving data with the external devices __f is carried out via the data register m Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose serial communication function the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the PLC and an external device Sending data Receiving data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored Data received from the communication port is stored in the data register used as the send buffer in the receive buffer specified in the system register DT When F159 MTRN is executed the data and the reception done flag goes on Data can be is output from the communication port received whenever the reception done flag is off Data Data register DT Data transmission using Data register DT writing F159 MT Device with RS232C port The terminator specified in the system register When data is being received the reception done is automatically added to the data that has flag is controlled by the F159 MTRN instruction been sent No terminator is included in the stored data Th
165. ecimal constants HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation H HO to HEFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation F 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 F 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 Note1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 There are two types one is the hold type that the last state is stored even if the power supply turns off or the mode is changed to PROG mode from RUN mode and the other is the non hold type that the state is reset For C10 C14 C16 C32 The hold type areas and non hold type areas are fixed For information on the sections of each area refer to the performance specifications For 132 F32 The settings of the hold type areas and non hold type areas can be changed using the system registers On T32 if the battery has run out the data in the hold area may be indefinite Not cleared to 0 Notes The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting Instruction point Constant Floating point type F 13 10 13 4 Power Supply Unit and I O Link Unit Specifications 13 4 1 Power Supply Unit Specifications AFP0634 Po ttem iescription O Input Rated operating voltage 100 240 V AC Operating voltage range 85 264 V AC Rated frequency 50 60 Hz Operatin
166. ecurity Settings dialog box Security Settines Status Information Password protection Password set and user logged in Password retry count zl Upload Protection _ Enable upload protection PLC Protection Password Please enter up to 8 characters Enter old password Enter new password Repeat new password FP Memory Loader C Enable upload protection C Allow download to PLC only if password in the PLC is the same PLC Access Please enter up to 8 characters Enter password Change Protection Clear Protection a j 11 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error or a self diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred Procedure 1 Check if the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing sar Example If the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing check lt 11 2 1 If ERROR ALARM LED is Flashing gt Procedure 2 Execute a total check FPWIN GR or check compile FPWIN Pro to determine the location of the syntax error Using FPWIN GR Select Debug on the menu bar and select Totally check program Click on the Execute button in the total check dialog box Using FPWIN Pro Select Compile All under Project or Check under Object on the menu bar As the dialog box is displayed check the contents 11 3 Operation Errors 11 3 1 Outline of Operation Errors An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when
167. ed NA CNA DT90331 Notused CNA NAA DT90332 Notused NA NA DT90333 Notused NA CNA DT90334 Notused CNA NAA DT90335 Notused NA NA DT90336 Notused NA CNA DT90337 Notused CNA NAA DT90338 Notused NA CNA DT90339 Notused CNA CNA DT90340 Notused CNA NAA DT90341 Notused NA NA DT90342 Notused NA NA DT90343 Notused NA CNA DT90344 Notused NA ONA DT90345 Notused NA CNA DT90346 Notused NA CNA DT90347 Notused NA NAA DT90348 Notused CNA NAA DT90349 Notused NA NA DT90350 Notused NA NA DT90351 Notused CNA NA DT90352 Notused NA NA DT90353 Notused NA NAA DT90354 Notused CNA NAA DT90355 Notused NA CNA DT90356 Notused NA CNA DT90357 Notused CNA NAA DT90358 Notused NA CNA DT90359 Notused NA CNA DT90360 Notused CNA NAA DT90361 Notused NA NA DT90362 Notused NA CNA DT90363 Notused ENA CNA Note1 Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only 15 35 FPOR A Available N A Not available When HSC control is executed by Control flag monitor area DT90376 Notused _ DT90377 Not used DT90378 Not used DT90379 Not used DT90380 PLS CHO When pulse output control is Gontro tag monitor executed by FO MV S DT90052 Arpa enetstol instruction the setting value for the Outp
168. ed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed Therefore the acceleration deceleration is smoother compared to the trapezoidal control type 1 After the execution of the instruction the speed can be changed within the range of the target speed To change the target speed to the one faster than the target speed right after the execution select the type 1 Deceleration time in program 1 2 2 Frequency Peas ae Frequency time Deceleration Acceleration time time Lhe a ee re Aen Target speed fd i aalan sp A Calculates the section ss change between target speed Calculates the section before speed change Calculates the section between target speed Calculates the section between i and initial speed as between initial speed and creep speed as initial spaed and target speed speed table of 30 steps and target speed as speed table of 30 steps as speed table of 30 steps lt speed table of 30 steps i Target speed 1 EEEE ee Before speed change Decelerates with each step initial oO N assigned in each section and wanes Initial with the same slope speed speed Time Time Speed change command Trapezoidal control Type 1 F171 Specify the time from the initial soeed to the maximum speed 50 kHz as acceleration time and the time from the maximum speed 50 kHz to the initial soeed as deceleration time in the pr
169. eleration time Deceleration time Frequency 300ms 450ms BOKHz b 22 22 147ms Target speed 2nd change 30kHz Target speed 25kHz Target speed 1st change 5kHz JOG positioning operation start R30 i JOG positioning operation unning pang 7 F171 instruction trigger l JOG positioning operation parameter setting JOG positioning operation complete R302 Speed change command R31 Speed change command R32 Position control start input R33 Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Sample program R30 R9120 R302 R300 DF R300 R300 R301 F DMV H 10100000 DT 300 F1 DMV K1000 DT 302 Fa DMV K25000 DT 304 F1 DMV K300 DT306 J F1 DMV K450 DT 308 F1 DMV K12500 DT310 R300 H F171 SPDH DT 300 KO R31 HDF _ F1 DMv __ K 5000 DT 304 R32 HDF F1 DMV K30000 DT304 R33 or _ Fo mv H140 DT 90052 F0 MV H100 DT 90052 R9120 R300 T30 R302 Hory R302 TMX 30 K 3 Precautions during programming To change the speed specify the execution condition of F171 instruction to be always executed Using the type 1 enables to perform the acceleration deceleration control up to the maximum speed 50 kHz 8 48 8 4 15 Data Table Control Instruction F174 Pulses are output from the specified channel according to the specified data table Positioning is performed sequentia
170. en set as the receive buffer The number of bytes z i mekke pai a Specify the data registers in system register 416 to this area 419 The number of bytes of data received is stored in the starting address of the receive buffer The initial value Reception data is 0 t Tos edna Received data is stored in the received data storage indicate the order of SA area in order from the lower order byte Reception process When the reception done flag R9038 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device The R9038 flag is off during the first scan after RUN 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the receive buffer Header and terminator start and end codes are not stored Beginning of reception Re opening Received data A B T amp p UV R9038 ON OFF Execution condition R10 Reception Reception is Reception is possible not possible is possible Execution of F159 MTRN 2 When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not turn on Check the number of received bytes to judge whether the reception has completed or not 3 When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R9038 turns off except the case when the terminator
171. ending on the channel number being used e The output turned on and off can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R When using CHO with incremental input and When using CHO with two phase input and reset input reset input FPOR Count input ia A phase input i B phase input Reset input Reset input X2 X2 w ON and OFF output x ON and OFF output 7 z hid n The output turned on and off when the target The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired as desired Reference lt 8 2 1 Table of Specifications gt 8 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction F0 e This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction e Counter software reset bit0 e Counting operation enable disable bit1 e Hardware reset enable disable bit2 e Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F167 bit3 e Clear target value match interrupt bit3 Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO X7 P In the above program the reset is performed in step MALOR eo M H 1
172. ent status Indicates the current status of the password setting There are following five statuses Password is not set Password Is not set 4 digits Protect Four digit password and access is prohibited 4 digits Available to access Four digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs 8 digits Available to access Eight digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs Available retry counts This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession up to 3 times Every time incorrect password is input the number will decrease If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession you cannot access the program Turn the power supply of the FPOR off and then on again to try to input the password again IES er Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again 9 3 How to prohibit access with password 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed set PLO Password Untitlel gs X Curent status 2 Fassword is not set Close Available ret counts 3 counts RE digit number Se Help 4 digits Hex f A digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access f Prote
173. ental input X0 Reset input X2 Do not set input Decremental input X0 XO as high speed Decremental input X0 Reset input X2 counter Individual input X0 X1 Individual input X0 X1 Reset input X2 Incremental decremental control input X0 X1 Incremental decremental control input X0 X1 Reset input X2 CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter l Incremental input X1 Incremental inptu X1 Reset input X2 X1 as high speed Decremental input X1 counter Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 No Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Two phase input X3 X4 Two phase input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 CH2 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Do not set input Decremental input X5 High speed counter operation mode settings X0 to X2 Do not set input High speed counter y O eb Q S Some ho O O High speed X3 as high speed Decremental input X5 Reset input X5 counter ee operation counter Individual input X3 X4 Individual input X3 X4 Reset input X5 mode 5 Incremental decremental control X3 X4 settings X3 to X5 ncremental decremental control X3 X4 Reset input X5 Does not set input X4 as high speed counter CH3 Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 Do not set input X6 as high speed cou
174. entfromthe 1 Starting from DT100 COMI port the contents of 8 bytes are sent from communication port K1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 The data is sent from the communication port using the F159 MTRN instruction Explanatory diagram 1 The characters are converted to ASCII Data register DT code and the data is stored in the send buffer Be DEN 2 Data transmission using F159 MTRN pree SS J ABCDEFGH t H External GS device 7 21 Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S At the beginning of transmission the number of bytes to be transmitted is set 0 is set on completion of transmission Transmitted data storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission Stn 2n 2n 1 Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data storage area specified in S Transmission process When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on and the transmission done flag R9039 is on operation is as follows 1 The number of transmission data N is preset in the start address of send buffer S The reception done flag R9038 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to 0 2 The set data is transmitted in order from the l
175. eption done flag R9038 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Therefore if F159 MTRN is executed at the same time the terminator is received the reception done flag will not be detected 7 26 Sending data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Transmitted data STA a b ETX Transmission Transmission done flag D R9039 J Duplex transmission teens F159 J RNI IS ben F159 MTRN a instruction execution Send buffer a b Number of bytes not yet eds transmitted E Transmission pointer Header STX and terminator ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted The data is transmitted to an external device When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the transmission done flag R9039 goes off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 must be observed 1 21 7 5 6 Changing Communication Mode Using F159 MTRN Instruction An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8000 for n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction Changing from general purpose to computer link R9032 RO Hor H H _ gt 1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set
176. er No of write blocks No of words FPO FPO compatibility mode _ Approx 100ms 32 blocks 2048 words 33 blocks 2112 words 41 blocks 2624 words 64 blocks 4096 words 256 blocks 16320 words 2F170 PWM instruction specifications PWM output instruction The settable frequencies differ Especially the setting for the low frequency band cannot be specified Setting eo HO Ee compatibility mode pot 000 JF 000 J p50 900 oB 081887 ee ene H 1886 7 a Error occurs s 3 Data size of elapsed value and target value of pulse output and high speed counter The data size is changed FPO 24 bits FPO compatibility mode 32 bits 4 F144 TRNS instruction specifications Serial data communication The following 2 items in the specifications for sending data are changed 1 Processing of starting data of send buffer FPO Stores the number of unsent bytes every one byte transmission FPO compatibility mode Stores 0 after the completion of all data transmission 2 Restriction on the number of sent bytes FPO No restriction FPO compatibility mode 2048 bytes 5 F169 PLS instruction specifications Pulse output JOG operation The following 2 items in the specifications are changed 1 Operation mode and direction output setting process FPO 00 No counting mode is selectable FPO compatibility mode 00 No counting mode is not selectable Performs the same operation as the one when specifying 10
177. er symbol mode In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a program with a step ladder area Write in the order JP LBL or LOOP LBL Delete in the order LBL JP or LBL LOOP 12 6 Processing During Forced Input and Output 12 6 1 Processing When Forced Input Output is Initiated During RUN Forced set reset processing External input gt X External output Y Tritt Input output update Ferd ote peony e 1 Processing of external input X Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure B At this time the input LED will not blink however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten As for contacts not specified the on off state will be read according to the input status from the input device 2 Processing of external output Y Regardless of the state of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure A At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcibly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result 3 Processing of Timer T and Counter
178. er 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits in the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time Chapter 3 Expansion 3 1 Expansion Method The FPO FPOR expansion units expansion I O unit high performance unit are connected to the right side of the control Unit Unit expansion is done using the right side connector for FPO FPOR expansion and the expansion hooks on the side of the unit 1 Peel the seal on the right side of the unit to expose the internal right side connector for the FP0O FPOR expansion am Peel the seal 3 Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units 3 2 Part Names and Functions Expansion Units ES8RS E16RS ES8RM E16RM E16 E32 Terminal type Connector type xi pa 5 xO K9 E ga s al E Fa S H 2 a o I i I A 3 13 a wi i aj fa Pa YE o kn LEL Y s Co a Ya al E N FETT 7 Hg E d amp EN L Expansion output units E8 E16y E8YRS Terminal type a YA A Ya Expansion input units EAX x Part Names and Functions 1 Power supply connector Supply 24 V DC It is connected using the cable AFP0581 supplied with the unit 2
179. er does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number Data error i l designation size designation range or format designation Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN PC mode error made Link system error 15 78 External memory error Protect error Address error No program error and No data error Rewrite during RUN error 167 17 171 Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an instruction ED
180. eration is smoother compared to the JOG positioning control Type 0 The speed cannot be changed after the execution of the instruction er Deceleration Frequency Acceleration j time time See Rene BERSON S OAN ENEN speed 1 Cateadoles ika aadi Calculates the sacton between cuates on target speed and target speed between initial speed and 2 as speed table of 30 steps target speed 1 as speed table of 30 steps Calculates the secton Target target sosed 2 speed 2 and initial speed as speed table of 30 steps Initial SY speed Target value Time Position control start input JL Frequency Target Target speed 1 7 Initial speed Acceleration time Calculates the section Calculates the between target speed 1 and section between target speed 2 as speed target speed 2 and table of 30 steps initial speed as speed table of 30 Steps Target value Time Position control start input _J L 8 55 8 4 18 Pulse Output Instruction Flag Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the pulse output Allocation and role of pulse output instruction flag When a pulse output instruction F171 F 1 72 F174 F175 F177 or PWM output instruction F173 is executed and pulses are being output the pulse output instruction flag of the corresponding channel is ON No other pulse output instruction can be e
181. erformance and functions of the FPOR 2 Using the programs in the same specifications as the FPO lt enables to execute the programs in the same specifications as the FPO FPO compatibility mode The points to take care when using the FPO programs on the FPOR are described below in the above 2 cases When using the programs in the FPOR specifications When using the programs in the same specifications as the FPO When using the programs in the FPOR specifications As the FPO programs cannot be used as they are it is required to change the following 3 items for the FPO programs before downloading the programs into the FPOR 1 Change in the model setting Change the model for the FPO programs to the one for the FPOR with a tool software 2 Resetting of system registers As the system registers will be initialized once the model setting is changed reset the system registers if necessary 3 Modification of the programs Depending on programs they should be changed according to the specifications of FPOR vii Differences between specifications of FPO and FPOR effecting program change Change in data areas Change in supported instructions Change in special internal relays Change in special data registers vill As the size of the data area and the settings of hold and non hold areas changes check if the address of the used data memory is correct The area that has been used as a hold area might be a non hold are
182. erify the mode with the status indicator LED Restart the power supply to operate in the mode set with the RUN PROG mode switch 3 USB connector Mini USB B type 5 pin This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial USB cable USB2 0 cable A miniB can be used 2 Tool port RS232C This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit Pin No Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction Signal Ground SG Unit gt External device 3 Receive Data RD Unit External device Not used rs E Unit gt External device The followings are the default settings when the unit is shipped from the factory The system register should be used to change these Baud rate 9600bps Char Bit 8 bits Parity check Odd parity Stop bit 1 bit Note The unit number of the tool port should be set by the system register Input connector Input status LEDs 7 Output connector 2 Output indicator LEDs Power supply connector 24 V DC Supply 24 V DC It is connected using the power supply cable AFPG805 supplied with the unit COM port RS232C or RS485 Communication interface for connection with an external device such as a programmable display CD expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units The hook on the right side is also used for installation on the flat type mounting plate AFP0804
183. errupt program for an interrupt hich occurred Interrupt i Stops Check the number of the interrupt program error and change it to agree with the interrupt request Multi CPU CPU2 This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system unmatch Stops Refer to Multi CPU system Manual An abnormal unit is installed FP FPOR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then S turn off the power and replace the unit with a tops new one FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one gt Remove the illegal unit from the slave station MEWNET F The number of slots or I O points used for remote MEW NET F remote I O system exceeds the St limitation one Re configure the system so that the MEWNET F A unit which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET F link system is f Stops installed on the slave station illegal unit limitation number of slots and I O points is within the specified range MEWNET F I O overlap or I O setting that is over the I O St range is detected in the allocated I O and mapping OPS MEWNET F I O map error Re configure the I O map correctly A Available 15 72 Opera tion status MEWNET F slave I O terminal Stops mapping
184. es multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on or off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area a Reads the contents of a data area Write data area WD Writes data to a data area R imer nter i ead timer counter set Reads the timer counter setting value value area Write timer nter i ite timer counter set ws Wrte the timer counter setting value value area R imer counter ead timer counte RK Reads the timer counter elapsed value elapsed value area Write timer nter ite timer counte WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value elapsed value area Register or R egister O eset MC Registers the contact to be monitored contacts monitored Regi R i egister or Reset data yp Registers the data to be monitored monitored Monitoring start a Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC Preset contact area fill Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off command pattern Preset data area fill Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified command range Read system register Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller RUN mode lt gt PROG mode Read
185. etected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition AI AIA Feo Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion A unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error AI AJAJAJA E57 Opera tion status MEWNET F terminal Conti station nues error MEWNET F I O update Conti synchro nues nous error Multi CPU I O regis tration Conti error nues CPU2 only IC memory card back Conti up battery nues error IC memory card back Cont up battery inues error Incompati ble IC Cont memory inues card error No unit for the Conti configu nues ration Self diagnostic Stop error set by F148 ERR P148 Conti PERR nues instruction Description and steps to take
186. ety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit externally Emergency stop circuit Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device Start up sequence The PLC should be started after booting the I O device and mechanical power apparatus To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized Note In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Grounding When installing the controller next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground for each device 5 8 2 Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 5 ms the FPOR continues to operate If the power is off for 5 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset 5 8 3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections Power supply An insulated power su
187. execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error 15 67 Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnormal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DI9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will be stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagn
188. exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction Such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC_BAT Table of Contents Before You Start Programming Tool Restrictions When Using FPO Programs 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit ccceeesssseeeeeees 1 1 ITUNE IYE Sesen A aig e catalan een equities 1 2 1 2 Restrictions on Unit Combination ccc cceeccceeecceeeeceeeeeaeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeees 1 7 1 9 Programming OOS repessar a E RERNA 1 8 2 Specifications and Functions of Control
189. f OFF If transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PC PLC link is not being used Operation mode relays For PC PLC link 0 R9070 to R907F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9090 to R909F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 The operation modes RUN PROG can be checked for any given PLC Relay no Rear Rear Re070 Rear Rear oora Roars roor Ror Roars Rora roza rora Roran era Wto 6 fi ts e uj olests 7 els 4 3 2 1 Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off OFF When the unit is in the PROG mode PLC link transmission error relay R9050 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission Unitno 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 st 7 esi 4 3 2ii ON When a transmission error has occurred in the PC PLC link or when there is an error for on off in the setting for the PC PLC link area OFF When there is no transmission error Conditions 3 Key Point Monitoring the PC PLC link status Using a programming tool the PC PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored Using FPWIN GR Select Status Display under Online in the menu Click the PC link button after the Status Display screen is shown Using FPWIN Pro Select PLC Link Status under Online in the menu Note Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible from the programming tool 7 44 7 6 7
190. ferences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model Display Display method FP1 FP M FP2 FP3 FP10SH ERROR Continually lit FP FPO FPOR FP X ERROR ALARM Flashes continually lit Screen display Continually lit E Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then
191. ff This section of the program is processed as if RO are on The output is determined by the final operation results If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer functions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the final results of the operation lt Example gt Output to the same output relay YO with OT KP SET and RST instructions XO YO c YO ON X1 YO csl YO ON X2 YO cc R gt YO OFF When XO to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress use a partial I O update instruction F143 12 3 12 2 Handling Index Registers 12 2 1 Index Registers Like other registers index registers have 14 points 10 to ID for reading and writing 16 bit data Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number This is called index modification lt Example gt Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register RO t FO MV DT 100 IODTO Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of 10 with DTO acting as a base For example when I0 contains K10 the destination will be DT10 and when l0 is K20 the destination will be DT20 In this way index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with
192. ff when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is in the RUN mode MEWNET No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode WoO Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode PC PLC Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode link 0 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode operation Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode mode relay Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode ia Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode arte Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 12 Is in the RUN mode SA Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode MoA Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode ma Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode peal Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 Is in the RUN mode bag Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode A Available N A Not available 15 16 WR908 FPOR Relay No Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9080 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9081 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when no
193. fied by n Hexadecimal DGT S n d The specified one digit in S is transferred digit 4 bit me to the A one digit in D The digit is data move spe o on n 7 datamove pmv2 2 D S21 UZELO data move PMV2 S2 D S2 gt i dtamove ppmv2 2D S21 S21 D 3 D tt ope ete e data move PDMV2 S2 D S241 HE a a pio Te ppmv S210 vansenadio te area slaning at E PBKMV S2 D transferred to the area starting at D The data of S is transferred to the all area 7 o fel a B o g g PCOPY between D1 and D2 Data read aL The data stored in the expansion memory EEHEHE from EEP S2 D ofthe EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 XIXI KM xXx X ROM are transferred to the area starting at D EEP ROM 2 D transferred to the EEP ROM starting at D Ea mii The data stored in the expansion memory FFE from F ROM S2 D of the F ROM specified by S1 and S2 11 D x x are transferred to the area starting at D Data write to PICWT The data specified by S1 and S2 are 11 x ofo o eee eee lea transferred to the F ROM starting at D F12 Data read ICRD The data stored in the expansion memory P12 from IC card PICRD S2 D ofthe IC card specified by S1 and S2 Ti IEA are transferred to the area starting at D F13 Data write to CWT The data specified by S1 and S2 are P13 transferred to the IC card expansion memory area s
194. fined in the buffer JOJJE Data read from The oldest data beginning from S Pie FIFO buffer that was written to the buffer is read D and stored in D F117 Data write into FIFW S The data of S is written to the buffer slx lololo P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from D JOJJE Basic function instructions F118 UP DOWN counter UDC S D Counts up or down from the value value in D F119 Left right shift LRSR D1 Shifts one bit to the left or right with register D2 the area between D1 and D2 as the register Data rotate instructions Rotates the n bits in data of D to P120 rotate PROR the right rotate PROL the left F122 16 bit data right RCR D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area P122 rotate with carry PRCR consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the right 16 bit data left RCL Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area rotate with carry PRCL consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the left 32 bit data right DROR D Rotates the number of bits specified rotate PDROR by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right F126 32 bit data left DROL bee the number of bits specified P126 rotate PDROL n of the double words data 32 om pecs by D 1 D to the left F127 32 bit data right DRCR Rotates the number of bits specified P127 rotate with carry e by n
195. formed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simultaneously with the change If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact relays which are on will be held in the on state To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If deleted the output memory area will be held Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode Write in the order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET 12 13 FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Operation of each Instruction 12 14 JP LOOP LBL A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram Be sure to write the instruction for setting the loop number before LBL LOOP instructions Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladd
196. function used Deviation ar Position Pulse High speed counter counter clear Near Target Home control Elapsed Target area for channel No home h i starting instruct value value area match put input ey heh input i area Note5 on off DT90400 DT90402 DT90404 DT90410 DT90412 DT90414 DT90420 DT90422 DT90424 Coe e fel ve e De fee ee ore ere DT90430 DT90432 DT90434 oma ve v7 nel ve 7 orecosa xe roras Bronaai preesse proses lt bit4 gt DT90400 DT90402 DT90404 ofja wo n e e e DT90410 DT90412 DT90414 na babade va wr oe e DT90420 DT90422 DT90424 DT90430 DT90432 DT90434 Note1 The pulse output function is available only for the transistor output type Note2 When using CH2 or CH3 with the C16 type the deviation counter clear output cannot be used Also Y6 and Y7 are also used for the pulse output of CH3 and the deviation counter clear of CHO or CH1 and they can be used only as one of the outputs Note3 The home inputs X4 to X7 are also used for the input of the high speed counter It is necessary to set how to use each input by system registers Note4 The near home input is used by assigning an arbitrary contact and operating the bit 4 of the special data register DT90052 with the instruction FO Note5 The home control start input is used for the trigger to start the position control when using the JOG positioning instruction F171 It is used by specifying XO to X3
197. g chart Acceleration time Deceleration time Frequency 100ms 1000ms Target speed 10kHz Initialspeed 1kHz Time Positioning operation start R10 3 Positioning operation running R100 F171 instruction execution R101 Positioning operation complete R102 Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Data table Data register Setting item Unit Example of sample program Settable range No Type 0 Incremental Set according to the control code CW CCW on the next page H1000 0000 Initial speed Hz DT104__ Target speed Hz K 2 147 483 648 to K DT110 Target value pulses K30000 2 147 483 647 Note 1 Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers 2 For type 0 the time from the initial speed to the target speed is specified as acceleration time or deceleration time For the details refer to 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions DT100 Control code 8 37 Sample program R10 R9120 R102 R100 DF R100 R100 R101 DF R101 F41 DMV H10000000 DT 100 F1 DMV K1000 DT 102 F1 DMV kK 410000 DT 104 F1 DMV K100 DT 106 F1 DMV K41000 DT 108 F1 DMV K30000 DT110 F171 SPDH DT 100 KO R9120 R100 TO R102 DF A R102 3 Control code 10 Fixed Control assignment 0 Trapezoidal m Type assignment 0 Type 0 1 Type 1 alnterrupt assignment 0 Execu
198. g frequency 47 to 63 Hz The number of phase Single phase Inrush current 30 A 0 p or less Cold start Leakage current 0 75 mA or less Holding time 10 ms or more Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage accuracy 5 Rated current 0 7A 0 to 0 7 A Output ripple 500 mV or less Over current regulation 0 735 A or more Over voltage regulation Possible 20000h at 55 C 13 4 2 I O Link Unit Specifications AFP0732 Po ttem ieseription O Communication method Two wire half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Duplex cable twisted pair cable or VCTF 0 75 mm2 x 2C lt JIS gt or equivalent Max 700 m when using twisted pair cable Max 400 m when using VCTF cable Baud rate 0 5Mbps No of I O points per one I O link unit 64 points Input 32 points Output 32 points Remote I O map allocation 32X 32Y Interface RS485 compliant Transmission error check CRC method Note Those numbers of points are the numbers that can be used for I O link via a host computer and the network MEWNET F When setting the output of the 1 O link error flag to ON available it is 63 points 31 input points amp 32 input points Transmission line Transmission distance Total length Note 13 11 13 12 Chapter 14 Dimensions and Others 14 1 Dimensions 14 1 1 C10 C14 Control Unit Terminal Block E FPORC1OCRS 14CRS W FPORC10RS 14RS E When mounting terminal block and power supply cable Max inst
199. ge temperature 40 to 70 C T32 only 20 to 70 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C No condensation Storage humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C No condensation Ry output type Between input terminals and output 1500 V AC terminals for 1 minute for 1 minute Between output terminals and output UU 1500 V AC terminals Between different commons for 1 minute Breakdown voltage l Between input terminals and power ground 500 V AC 500 V AC Detection current 5 mA i l terminals for 1 minute for 1 minute Between output terminals and 500 V AC 1500 V AC power ground terminals for 1 minute for 1 minute Between ground terminal and power 500 V AC 500 V AC terminal for 1 minute for 1 minute Tr output type Ry output type Between npu terminals and output Over 100 MQ Over 100 MQ terminals Between purpat terminals and output Over 100 MO terminals Between different commons Insulation resistance Test voltage 500 V DC Se terminas ang POWET QrOUNC avenqoo MO Over 100 MO canal output nes and Over 100 MQ Over 100 MO power ground terminals PONNBeAN ground terminals and power Over 100 MQ Over 100 MO terminal 5 to 9 Hz Single amplitude of 3 5 mm 1 sweep min Vibration resistance 9 to 150 Hz Constant acceleration of 9 3 m s 1 sweep min 10 min on 3 axes Towards X Y amp Z directions Shock resistance 147 m s 4 times on 3 axes T
200. gram stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled FP memory loader i E Program gt Password 01234567 lt W Limited distribution function ON Download is possible Password 01234567 p Password abcdefgh Password None Upload protection setting function If this function is valid the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader FP memory loader Program A _ Password 01234567 Upload protection function ON wy Programa WA Password 01234567 Kang i Upload is not possible Upload is prohibited FP memory loader 9 9 9 3 2 Setting Method Setting with FPWIN GR 1 Select Online gt Online Edit Mode in the menu bar and press the CTRL and F2 keys The screen is switched to Online Monitor 2 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed Set PLG Password Untitlel E xX PLE Home Settings Current status gt Password is not set Close Available retry counte 3 counts eE digit number a Help C 4 digitz Hex f 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode f Access f Protect C Unprotect a digits password tA Enter in alphanumeric i Setting for FP memory loader option T Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be
201. gramming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1TO 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC PLC link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1TO Permissible range for key word no 2 10 to 400 10 ms to 400 ms a Note If there are any units that have not been added to the link the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link If a short waiting time has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their power supply is on The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms 7 47 Error detection time for transmission assurance relays The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened using the SYS1 instruction lt Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1T1 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC PLC link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6400 ms to 10
202. gt Inputs 12th FO MV H 512 DT90055 opui 12 FO MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time Note If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 Clock calender setting are changed with the programming tool and 30 seconds software the time will be set when the new DT90058 correction register values are written Therefore it is A T32 only unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with X0 on XO lt pF gt Fo MV H 1 DT90058 gerest to At the time of coorection if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 seconds and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds DT90059 Communication error Error code is sotred here when a N A N A code communication error occurs 15 26 FPOR A Available N A Not available a Read Writ Step ladder process DT90060 0 to 15 Step ladder process DT90061 16 to 31 Step ladder process DT90062 32 to 47 Step ladder process DT90063 48 to 63 Step ladder process DT90064 64 to 79 Step ladder process DT90065 80 to 95 Step ladder process iiit 96 to 111 Step ladder p
203. h which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search C Program Files Panasonic EW Control FPOR_USB w 1 Browse Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware 4 Although the following dialog box appears during the installation click Continue anyway Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Panasonic Electric forks PLE Virtual UART has not passed Windows Logo testing to verity its compatibility with Windows F Lell me why this testing iz important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the corect operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway 5 Click Finish on the following screen to be displayed Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for F Panasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual UART a Click Finish to close the wizard Cancel 6 5 Procedure of installing the driver e g Windows 7
204. he ERROR does not turn off please a a Stops contact your dealer AlAIALAIAIAIAIA FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or Unit more link units E27 installation Stops A A A A AIA error gt Turn off the power and re configure units referring to the hardware manual System omen an abnormality in the system register Stops S9 Sts A Check the system register setting or error os Aten initialize the system registers 1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available 15 71 Opera tion status Configu ration A parameter error was detected in the Stops MEWNET W2 configuration area Set a parameter correct parameter Description and steps to take Interrupt St Probably a hardware abnormality error 0 opo gt Please contact your dealer An interrupt occurred without an interrupt Interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to Stops noise is possible error 1 gt Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no int
205. he commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer FAMN GR etc Command message PLC a Response message PEE TS 7 1 3 General purpose Serial Communication With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an external device connected such as an image processing device and a bar code reader Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FPOR while reading and writing of data from an external is handled through the data registers Image checker Data register DT Data transmission using F159 MTRN S Received data Received data Data received in receive buffer Data is sent to and received from external devices thruogh the data registers 1 2 7 1 4 PC PLC Link Using a commercial R232C RS485 converter enables to configure a PC PLC link MEWNET WO with the FPOR Exclusive internal relays link relays L and data registers link registers LD are shared between the connected PLCs Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 No 1 No 1 No 1 Send area i me eee eo Receive area No 2 No 2 No 2 q ma Receive area Receive area No FPOR FPOR FPOR RS485 The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs 7 1 5 MODBUS
206. he housing against the pressure connection toal so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type Attached terminal block Suitable wires A screw down connection type is used for the terminal block The suitable wires are given below Terminal block socket The terminal socket manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used No of pins Model No of Phoenix Contact Model No Product No MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 1840434 Suitable wires Twisted wire Size Nominal cross sectional area AWG 24 to 16 0 2mm to 1 25mm Pole terminals with compatible insulation sleeve lf a pole terminal is being used the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co should be used Manufacturer Cross sectional area _ Size Phoenix Contact model No Phoenix Contact Co 1 00mm AWG 18 Al 1 6 RD AI TWIN 2 x osme __fawerzn evans os aw Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Model No of Phoenix Contact Model No Product No Phoenix Contact Co CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436 For tightening the terminal block When tightening the terminals of the terminal block use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact Co Product No 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 Part No SZS 0 4x2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less 9 13 Wiring method 1 Remove a potion of the wire s insulation 2 Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts
207. he result of rewriting is a syntax error lt Example gt When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions 1 Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE 2 Subroutine instructions SUB RET 3 Interrupt instructions INT IRET 4 JP LBL 5 LOOP LBL 6 MC MCE Also rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax error 2 During the forced input output operation Interrupt restrictions When using interrupt high speed counter pulse output or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN lf a rewrite during RUN is executed the operation as below will be performed Exercise caution Interrupt programs will be disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again lt Example gt Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag R9013 ICTL 51 52 R9034 2 The high speed counter will continue to count Target value match on off instructions F166 F167 will continue Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166 F167 instruction is running 3 The pulse output PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed The operation after the completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction e n o en RA of rewriting during RUN compatibility continues continues F169 PLS Pulse output JOG operation F170 PWM PWM output FPOR mode F171 SPDH Pulse output Trapezoidal control F171 SPDH Pulse output JOG posi
208. he target position Acceleration cannot be performed from that position when the elapsed value goes beyond the acceleration forbidden area starting position The acceleration forbidden area starting position can be monitored by the special data registers shown in the table below The speed cannot be changed to a value below the deceleration minimum speed If a value below the deceleration minimum speed is specified the speed will be corrected The deceleration minimum speed can be monitored by the special data registers shown in the table below Pulse output control area Acceleration forbidden area starting position area DT90407 DT90408 to DT90409 DT90417 DT90418 to DT90419 Channel No Deceleration minimum speed area 8 41 8 4 13 JOG Positioning Control Instruction F171 When the trigger execution condition turns on the JOG operation is started When the position control start input becomes effective a specified pulse is output and the deceleration stop is performed The position control start input becomes effective when the leading edge of the external inputs XO to X3 or the bit 6 of the special data register DT90052 is detected To use the external inputs XO to X3 specify them by the system register No 402 for each channel Control method of JOG positioning control instruction F171 Type 0 and Type 1 Type 0 Once the trigger execution condition turns on the JOG operation is started and acceleration is perfo
209. he timer counter range setting error Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area Program area error A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 15 69 15 70 Opera tion status Compile memory full error High level Instruction type error High level instruction operand combina tion error No program error Rewrite during RUN syntax error Description and steps to take The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program FP10SH If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are programmed using the same trigger continuously gt Correct the program so that the high level instructions e
210. he type of command If there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands if there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent Key Point With the FPOR an expansion header lt is supported to send single frame of up to 2048 characters as well as general Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max 118 characters Max 2048 characters Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer 1 Header Unit no of source PLC that processed the command decimal Text Processing results and communication error codes ar estored here Check code BCC Hexadecimal m Terminator Two Ga digit digit i Read value Processing results for contact area read contact is off name e g read contact area Response code 5 indicates a normal processing result indicates that an error occurred 1 Header Start code A ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C must be at the beginning of a message The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here 3 Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command If the processing is not completed successfully an err
211. hile the duplicated output condition exists it will be normally flagged as an error The ERROR ALARM LED will flash and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to check for duplicated use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using FPWIN GR Select the Debug gt Totally Check Program in the menu bar and click Execute If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed Using FPWIN Pro If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed when compiling programs Enabling duplicated output If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled In this case change the setting of system register 20 to enable When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed 12 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of internal and output relays during operation When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instructions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation lt Example gt Processing when SET RST and OT instructions are used X0 to X2 are all on This section of the program is processed as if RO are on This section of the program is processed as if RO are o
212. his position when nm changing the speed riun DT90419 Starting Higher words acceleration cannot be position performed 15 37 FPOR A Available N A Not available se DT90420 5 apsed value ee E for the transistor output type only DT90421 Higher words Note When controlling the F166 HC1S F167 HC1R DT90423 Higher words instructions the target DT90424 Target value value is stored The target value for match Est area for match DT90425 ON OFF ON OFF is stored Corrected PLS The initial soeed of the DT90426 speed of initial CH2 calculated result is stored speed Lower words nm The minimum for the DT90427 minimum nm DT90428 Acceleration If the elapsed value corsses acs forbidden area over this position when startin changing the speed DT90429 on Higher words acceleration cannot be p performed DT90430 Elapsed value Available for the transistor output type only DT90431 Higher words Note When controlling the DT90432 pulse output CH by nal det value F166 HC1S F167 HC1R ce DT90433 Higher words instructions the target Ea DT90434 Target value value is stored area for match The target value for match DT90435 ON OFF Higher words ON OFF is stored Corrected PLS The initial speed of the DT90436 speed of initial CH3 calculated result is stored speed Lower words nm The minimum ir for the forbidden area over this position when nm changing the speed run DT90439 ead Higher word
213. ilable Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e only 2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later FPO FP e FPX 5 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 7 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 15 59 Boolean 16 bit binary GRY data gt Gray PGRY code conversion 32 bit binary data gt Gray Ops Description rand S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray codes and the converted result is stored in the D DGRY S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of PDGRY S 1 S to gray code and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D S D Converts the gray codes of S to P237 binary data PGBIN binary data and the converted conversion result is stored in the D F238 32 bit gray code DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S P238 binary data PDGBIN to binary data and the converted O gt x FPO FP e T FP E O FP2SH FP10SH code conversion F237 16 bit gray code GBIN EESESEN p amp eo OO ASCII gt binary ATOB data conversion S1 Converts multiple ASCII data to S2 n multiple binary data D conversion result is stored in the D 1
214. ing FPWIN Pro 1 Change the mode to offline 2 Select Action on error from the system register table of the project navigator 3 Change the setting of No 26 11 3 3 Dealing with Operation Errors lt Procedure gt 1 Check the location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clear the error Use a programming tool to clear the error When using FPWIN GR select Online gt Status Display in the menu bar Execute Clear Error When using FPWIN Pro select Monitor gt PLC Status Press the Error Clear button An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 If the mode selector is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared So if the cause of the error is not removed the error may seem not to be cleared 11 3 4 Points to Check in Program 1 Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register lt Example gt When a data register is modified using an index register RO _ FO MV DTO ODTO In this case index register modifies the address of data register DTO However it may exceed the addressabl
215. ing edge Turns on the contact for only one differential scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Turns on the contact for only one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan SET YRL E Output is set to and held at on S 3 Oo o D Oo E Neen ee eee l Trailing edge differential Leading edge differential initial execution D Output is set to and held at off R ey Outputs at set trigger and holds until ee a reset trigger turns on a ae ad type Basic function instructions On delay timer After set value n x 0 001 seconds timer contact a is set to on TMR ti After set value n x 0 01 seconds timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 0 1 seconds TMY T timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 1 second timer contact a is set to on Auxiliary timer F137 vaLe After set value S x 0 01 seconds 16 bit i Heise s OH H the specified output and R900D are set to on Auxiliary timer F183 YRLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds 32 bit H HewosmscH H the specified output and R900D are set to on Time constant i HFeamsiss J Executes the filter processing for the xlo processing i specified input E Ma C Decrements from the preset value n
216. input X0 o X0 X1 of the main unit The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X1 of the main unit The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X2 or X2 X3 of the main unit The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X3 of the main unit The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X4 or X4 X5 of the main unit The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only 15 34 FPOR A Available N A Not available TAT Read Writ Description i ing ing Counting area for input X5 of PA n the main unit A A A Address DT90320 Elapsed Lower words DT90321 Higher words aa aie target value is set when DT90322 T t ad instructions F166 HC1S and Lower words Notet EE Higher words F167 HC1R are executed A Notet DT90324 Notused NA CNA DT90325 Notused NA CNA DT90326 Notused NA CNA DT90327 Notused CNA CNA DT90328 Notused NA CNA DT90329 Notused NA NA DT90330 Notus
217. instruction is used to read and write the pulse number counted by the pulse output control Specify this F1 DMV instruction in combination with the pulse output elapsed area after the special data register DT90400 When executing the F1 DMV instruction with DT90400 the elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of the special data registers DT90400 and DT90401 The elapsed values can be read or written with this F1 DMV instruction only Example 1 Writing the elapsed value XT Set the initial value K3000 in the pulse output LDF F1 DMV K3000 DT90400 CHO Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X8 Read the elapsed value of the pulse output DF F1 DMV DT90400 DT100 CHO to DT100 and DT101 Elapsed value area Channel No Pulse output elapsed value area CHO DT90400 to DT90401 CH1 DT90410 to DT90411 CH2 DT90420 to DT90421 CH3 DT90430 to DT90431 aF Note The elapsed value area varies during scanning Replace it with an arbitrary data register at the beginning of the program as necessary in cases such as using it several times in the program 8 27 8 4 7 JOG Operation Instruction F172 This instruction is used to output pulses according to a specified parameter when the trigger execution condition is on When the trigger execution condition turns off deceleration is performed within a specified deceleration time However if the trigger turns on again acceleration is performe
218. internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation No Name Nw Receive area Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size With the above settings the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays Used No Name N Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size Used With the above settings the 28 words consisting of LD100 to LD127 can be used as internal registers 7 41 cS er Note Precautions When Allocating Link Areas If a mistake is made when allocating a link area be aware that an error will result and communication will be disabled Avoid overlapping send areas When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC there must be a link relay and link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side In the example shown below there is an area between No 2 and No 3 which is overlapped and this will cause an error so that communication cannot be carried out Example of link relay allocations FPOR FPX FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 WLO WLO WLO a x T Receive area 39 Overlap f No 3 i Receive area mmm Send area 63 54 63 System registers Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission o l2 l3 o Link relay transmission size Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not pos
219. ints X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 E8R Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 a Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 FPO FPOR i onun E16X Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F p E16R Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40toX47 X60 to X67 E16T P Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y4 Y60 to Y67 E16YT P Output 16 points 20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4 Y60 to Y6F i F X X i F Y Y 7 7 Y F ch0 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F unit ch1 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F W 4 6 FPO AID Input 16 points X2 WX WX converter unit FPO A80 chO 2 4 6 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F i WX5 WX7 FPO FPO TC4 thermocouple FPO TC8 Input 16 points WX3 unit ch1 3 5 7 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Input 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 CHO 2 4 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F mm FPO FPO RTD Input 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7 RTD unit CH1 3 5 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F wy2 WY4 WY6 Output 16 points oq to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F converter unit FPO A04I cho 2 Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F ch1 3 Y30 to Y3F Y50 to Y5F Y70 to Y7F X60 to X7F_ FPO I O link FPO IOL Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F unit Output 32 points Y20
220. ion of first scan after RUN begins The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation of instruction Not executed Executed If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior to switching to RUN mode make a program as below using R9014 initial pulse off relay R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan lt Example 1 gt DF leading edge differential instruction AOD YO HoF y y Add R9014 xO R9014 YO mD RUN Power on AD Yo Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the DF instruction is off to on at the second scan therefore derivative output is obtained lt Example 2 gt CT counter instruction XO CT 100 X1 T Add R9014 XO R9014 CT 100 X1 RUN Power on XO CT100 counting fy operation Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count is incremented 12 7 12 3 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction If a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction it will be executed only under the following condition The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution co
221. ion trigger R100 i Positioning operation parameter p401 setting pulse Positioning operation complete R102_ Speed change command R11 Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Sample program R9120 R102 R100 R101 F1 Dmv H10010000 DT100 F1 Dmv K10000 DT102 F1 Dmv K20000 DT104 F1 DMV K 1000 DT106 F1 DMV K800 DT108 F1 DMV K100000 DT110 _ F171SPDH DT100 KO _ F1 Dmv 30000 DT104 R100 TO R102 TMX 0 K 3 L Precautions during programming To change the speed specify the execution condition of F171 instruction to be always executed Using the type 1 enables to perform the acceleration deceleration control up to the maximum speed 50 kHz Speed cannot be changed when the instruction is executed in the interrupt program 8 40 8 4 12 Precautions When Changing Speed Common to F171 and F172 Precautions during programming To change the speed specify the execution condition of instruction to be always executed Using the type 0 of trapezoidal control instruction F171 enables to perform the acceleration deceleration control up to the target value Using the type 1 of trapezoidal control instruction F171 enables to perform the acceleration deceleration control up to the maximum speed 50 KHz The speed cannot be changed during the deceleration requested by the deceleration stop and during the deceleration to stop at t
222. ions C10 C14 C10 C14 Common to all control units Terminal block type Connector type Alain Operation monitor LEDs These LEDs display the current operation status of PLC such as RUN STOP and ERROR ALARM LED Lights In the RUN mode The program is being executed RUN Green Flashes The forced input output is being executed in the RUN mode The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Lights In the PROG mode The operation has stopped The forced input output is being executed in the PROG mode Flashes The forced input output is being executed in the RUN mode The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Flashes An error is detected during the self diagnostic function ERROR Lights A hardware error occurs or operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated ALARM PROG Green ERROR ALARM Red 2 2 2 RUN PROG mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of PLC Switch _ Operation mode RUN Position Up RUN mode The program is executed and the operation begins PROG Position Down PROG mode The operation stops In this mode programming can be done using a tool software Switching between RUN and STOP can be also performed by the remote operation from a programming tool When performing remote switching from the programming tool the setting of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ V
223. irection output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 e Up to four driver systems can be connected lt When using CH0 gt FPOR Home input Near home input Driver Pulse output Direction output Ld X0 or any other input can be specified for the near home input sa Reference lt 8 2 1 Table of Specifications gt 8 22 lt When using CH2 gt FPOR Home input Near home input Driver Pulse output Direction output X1 or any other input can be specified for the near home input Wiring example FPOR Input terminal Home sensor Near home sensor Positioning start Positioning start Home return start JOG start JOG start Overrun rs of be con acon a contact b contact tact tact Stepping motor Moving table side side BE own PMT na a Stepping motor driver Common E CW input Output terminal Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Common E CCW input Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a resister of 2 kQ 1 2 W to R1 and connect a resistor of 2 KQ 1 2 W 470 2 W to R2 Table of I O allocation X4 Home sensorinput X0 _ Near home sensor input X8 Positioning start
224. is indicated it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten Carry out the following operations FPWIN GR X Timeout eror while changing program in PLC Frogram may differ from PLC Flease click below Help button to find the way how to salwe it 1 When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left set it to the offline edit mode Complete the program conversion in the tool software and then change to the online edit mode to check 2 When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again After the operation change to the online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds Gommunication Settine pal Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The Transfer data screen will open select Condition to open Communication COM port Cancel Setting screen Baud rate 1115200 bps Initialize Network type Change the value for Timeout Click OK button to complete the change of setting It will be set as the following value automatically Data Length amp Stop Bit 1 f Even ro Time out 5 r Sec Parameter for automatic setting W Baud rate Ww Parity 12 11 Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN 1 When t
225. it eco power meter machine vision MEWTOCOL slave function This function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Aes ner Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function Both the master and slave functions are available for the FPOR however only the slave function is available for the tool and USB ports 7 4 2 MEWTOCOL Slave Function Outline of operation Command and response Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a response back to the computer On the computer side the execution result of the command can be confirmed by the transmitted response MEWTOCOL COM sketch Communication is carried out in a conversational format based on the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedures Data is sent in ASCII format The com
226. it from the COM port 7 54 Sample program For Type Il Use a program as below to directly specify a MODBUS address to 07 MODBUS command No to 6 register single point preset in DT100 Also for Receive command set the same settings except Modbus command No It should be 03 in DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 H Fo mv H 1607 DT100 FO MV HO WRO F1DMV_ HO DT50 s F1DMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 L R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31 R2 is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 H F61 DCMP DT50 DT60 O R1 R900B 49 1 gt F36 D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 2 words of the local unit to T the address No H7788 in the unit number 07 from COM1 R1 H F145 SEND DT 100 DT50 H7788 K2 FO MV H1 WRO e ro and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 F146 RECV DT 101 _ H7788 K2 DT60 FO MV HO WR 0 L For Send command set the used communication port to COM1 destination unit No RO R2 Sends a command to read the address No H7788 in the unit number 07 from COM1 la H Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data
227. it no 4 WLO 0 Receive area System registers eoo a No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission o l2 l4 lo Link relay transmission size 20 20 l2 lo Note No 40 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 LDO DO Send area 40 Receive area Receive area System registers No 2 No 3 T 41 Range of link registers used O so Jo Starting No for link register transmission 40 Link register transmission size 40o 40 48 lo Note No 41 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations 7 39 For PC PLC link 1 Link relay allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 WL64 Send area Receive area 03 03 Receive area 7 7 127 27 27 27 System registers No 1 No 4 Range of link relays used starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 jo Note No 50 range of link relays used must be set to the same r
228. itioning operation running F171 instruction trigger Positioning operation parameter eo setting pulse l Positioning operation complete m S es a speed change command R9120 Pulse output instruction flag Sample program R10 R9120 R102 R100 DF R100 R100 R101 DF m R101 c F 11 DMV H10000000 DT 100 F1 DMV K1000 DT102 F1 DMV K10000 DT 104 F1 DMV K100 DT 106 F1 DMV K1000 DT 108 F1 DMV K50000 DT 110 R100 c Fit SPDH DT 100 KO R11 DF Fi DMV K5000 DT 104 9120 R100 TO R102 DF R102 TMX 0 K 3 J Precautions during programming To change the speed specify the execution condition of F171 instruction to be always executed Using the type 0 enables to perform the acceleration deceleration control up to the target value Speed cannot be changed when the instruction is executed in the interrupt program 8 39 8 4 11 Speed Change After Starting Trapezoidal Control Type 1 F171 The explanation below shows the program to change the speed to a speed over the target speed during the trapezoidal control Use the type 1 to change the speed to a speed faster than the target speed Time chart Frequency age keh time i e time Target speed 50kHz 4 Target speed after speed change 30kHz Target speed before speed change 20kHz Initial speed 10kHz Positioning operation start R10 Positioning operation running ee F171 instruct
229. ived When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not work However if the code STX is added in the middle of the data the number of received byte is cleared to 0 and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer Sending data Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is Example The data 12345 is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device 1 Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion to ASCII code 12345 Data to be transmitted lt b Conversion to ASCII code H 31 32 33 34 35 Coded data 1 2 3 4 5 2 If DT 100 is being used as the start address of send buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte D1103 DTI 102 DT101 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upper byte Lower byte Upperbyte Lower byte H32 H31 5 4 3 3 1 Receiving data The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data Example The data 12345 is transmitted from a device with RS232C port If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first
230. k on the Settings button Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Access 4 digits or 8 digits Input the set password Once access is permitted the following message is displayed FPWIN GR i xi A PL is not protected tate 3 Click the OK button EST Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off when the access is permitted the PLC will be password protected again 9 5 How to cancel the password protection Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting Cancels the registered password to be specified All programs are retained All programs are deleted The upload protection setting is also deleted Erases all programs and security information to For ncel i a cancel the setting forcibly How to cancel the password protection Programs are retained 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed oet PLG Password Untitlel l xX Curent statuz B digits Protect Close Available ret counts 3 courts Pea el eel digit number A Help C 4 digits Hex f 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access C Protect 8 digits password tt Enter in alphanumeric Ek Setting for FP memory loader option F Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLE cannot be uploaded 2 Set the items in the table below and cli
231. l A DT90019 A A points absolute value x 10 67 us Elapsed ing A A A N A N A N A N A time between the two points Note The exact value is 10 67 us N A DT90021 Notused J CNA CNA Note1 It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan Note2 As DT90020 is renewed even if FO MV DT90020 and D instruction is being executed it can be used to measure the block time 15 21 FPOR A Available N A Not available Address Name Description ng ing Ing ing The current scan time is stored here Scan Sean time current time is calculated using the formula DT90022 value Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan Sean time minimum time is calculated using the formula DT90023 value No Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The maximum scan time is stored here The Scan time maximum scan time is calculated using the formula DT90024 value Not Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K125 indicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be stored here Monitor using DT90025 monitoring register 15 1 y 0 Bit No ST O INTO to 11 7 O INT No O interrupt disabled 1 interrupt enabled DT90026 Notused Periodical interrupt The value set by ICTL instruction is stored DT90027 interval INT24 KO periodical interrupt is no
232. l specifying the initial soeed target soeed acceleration time deceleration time and target value JOG positioning F171 Outputs specified pulses after the position control start input during the JOG operation Data table control F174 Outputs pulses according to a specified data table Linear F175 Performs the linear interpolation control by specifying the interpolation composite speed acceleration time deceleration time X axis target value and Y axis target value Setting the system register For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 8 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise counter clockwise output method Forward Reverse Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a CW pulse yo F F F F F reverse rotation pulse Y2 aaea FUGU Y3 Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON Forward Reverse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and Puce Puce vo FLELLELEL FLELELE LE another to specify the direction of Y2 _ rotation with on off signals In this d mode forward rotation is carried out irection Sign v3 anen the rotation direction signal is Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF Forward Reverse Control i
233. lapsed value will be stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301 e Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value XT Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed HDF F1 DMV K3000 DT90044 counter Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X7 Read the elapsed value of the high speed HDF F1 DMV DT90044 DT100 counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101 Note The elapsed value area varies during scanning Replace it with an arbitrary data register at the beginning of the program as necessary in cases such as using it several times in the program Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1 XA If the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 DF F166 HC1S KO K10000 Y7 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on Example 2 XB If the elapsed value DT90308 and DT90309 DF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 Y6 for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns on Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 XC If the elapsed value DT90304 and DT90305 DF F167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y4 for channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off Example 2 xD If the elapsed value DT90312 and DT90313 DF F167 HC1R K3 K40000 Ys for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off 8 13 Input pulse measurement instruction F178 This instruction is used to measure the pulse number and cycle of a specified high s
234. les positioning control With the exclusive instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and JOG FPOR Pulse output CW SLL Pulse output CCW Motor PLN driver 1 operation Pulse output CW FE Ce Pulse output CCW Motor JU Stepping motor servo motor PWM output function VWhen you increase the pulse width By using the exclusive instruction the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio y s Heating increases When you decrease it lt 7 Heating decreases 8 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter Number of Channel e There are six channels for the built in high speed counter e The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used Counting range e K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary e The built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there y Vax vabe Vin vate 8 3 8 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 8 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function Input output l Performance contact No being Memory area being used EPR Need specifications nputcontact Mini mum Maximum number valuein Control Elapsed Targe
235. letion sends a data Execute F145 read command Execute F146 SEND instruction RECV instruction Turns RO off With the above program the procedures 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM port 3 Reads the DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM port 7 16 7 4 7 Setting in Compatiblity Mode with FPO FPO Compatibility Mode Setting Communication Parameters Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FPO Note Only the salve function is available in the FPO compatibility mode Usable communication ports on FPOR FPO compatibility mode Tool port USB port No communication parameter COM port RS232C port Tool port settings Dialog box of PLC system register setting PUG Gost epur atin Unibile Ka gti Und No fi Ho dIt Commuricahon leergl Haban Concho Daia Lergh C Core 7 By F Not Connect fF 0 Big Nol Danae pemg i oiim e tiii a PL O No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 32 No 411 Communication format Modem connection Connect Not Connect Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Change the value to match the connected external device No 414 Baud rate setting The
236. lly according to the values of data tables and stops at the data table that the value of pulse output stop KO is written Time chart Frequency 5kHz 2 9kHz 1KHz 1000 4000 9000 11000 Elapsed value Movement amount Positioning operation start R40 i Fositioning operation running R40 Positioning operation start pulse R401 Positioning operation complete R402 Pulse output instruction flag R91 of po Data table Data register Setting item Unit Example of sample program No H1000 0010 l DT400 Control code Absolute i EAA E Folens CW CCW page DT402 Frequency 1 Hz K1000 DT404 Target value 1 pulses K1000 Settable range K2500 K1000 a OE K11000 O Note Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers 8 49 Sample program R400 R9120 R402 R400 DF R400 R400 R401 oF ______ _ _ ___ _ R401 F1 DMV 10000010 DT400 Control code H10000010 F1 DMV K 1000 DT402 Frequency 1 1000Hz F1 DMV kK 1000 DT404 Target value 1 1000 pulses F1 DMV K 2500 DT 406 Frequency 2 2500Hz F1 DMV K4000 DT408 Target value 2 4000 pulses F1 DMV K5000 DT410 Frequency 3 5000Hz F1 DMV k9000 DT412 Target value 3 9000 pulses F1DMV 1000 DT414 Frequency 4 1000Hz F1DMV K11000 DT46 Target value 4 11000 pulses FipMv KO DT418 Pulse output stop F174SPOH DT100 Ko Pulse output start R9120 R400 TO R402 Hor j R40
237. lt Example 1 gt Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch RO H DF H F81 BIN Wx1 10 Js number F81 BIN WX0 loSVO ss Wx1 WXO0 L Digital _J switches C Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register 10 2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of l0 lt Example 2 gt Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch 7 segment Timer elapsed l indicator value display R 1 l F81 BIN wx1 10 Js F80 BCD I0EVO WYO sss 2 C Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register 10 2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by 10 to BCD and output it to output relay WYO 12 5 12 3 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method 12 3 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions using the leading edge detection operation DF leading edge differential instruction Count input for CT counter instruction Count input for F118 UCD up down counter instruction Shift input for SR shift register instruction Shift input for F119 LRSR left right shift register instruction NSTP next step instruction Differential execution type high level instruction P13 NO ofR OD Leading edge detection method An instruction with a leading edge detection
238. match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously 8 8 8 3 High speed Counter Function 8 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function Instructions used and the contents of the controls Type of control Instruction Description number Reset disabling of counter Read Write of elapsed value Target value match ON OFF control FO Performs controls such as resetting the high speed counter of the specified channel or disabling the count Reads and writes the elapsed value of the high speed counter Turns on F166 instruction or off F167 instruction the specified output when the elapsed value of the high speed counter reaches the target value The output is used by presetting with an instruction such as the SET RET instruction Cam control Turns on or off a maximum of 31 points of internal relays according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter and the predetermined table Input pulse F178 Measures the pulse number and cycle of the high speed counter measurement Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set system register numbers nos 400 and 401 8 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode ON xo FLELFLE UL FOUL LE or X1 X3 X4 X6 X7 Count o 2 3 4 E n 3 n 2 n 1 a o gt Two phase input mode Increment input CW oJ LI ULC JULo X3 X6 gi a TUUL F
239. mes transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No of times procedural errors have occurred DT90179 No of times overlapping parent units have occurred DT90180 to DT90189 DT90194 to DT90218 15 31 FPOR A Available N A Not available ates name eserton u Unit No Station No is pT90219 selection for DT90220 to 2 Unit No Station No 1 to 8 A A DT90251 1 Unit No Station No 9 to 16 PC PLC Sucientiecie ter 42 and 43 Unit DT90222 station The contents of the system register settings No iorg ter 44and 45_ partaining to the PLC inter link function for DT90223 System regis the various unit numbers are stored as ter 46 and 47 __ shown below System regis DT90224 emma ean PC PLC lt Example gt aS i When DT90219 is 0 3 ter 42 and 43 Unit System regi Higher byte Lower byte DT90226 station YO m resis d ter 44and 45 DT90220t0 i s No 2 or 10 DT90243 DT90227 System regis Unit Station ter 46 and 47 No 1 Setting contents Ia of system register PC PLC a Setting contents of system DT90229 link register 41 43 45 and 47 Unit DT90230 station e When the system register 46 in the home S No 3 or 11 ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting the values in DT90231 System regis the home unit are copied in the system ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47 System regis When the system register 46 in the home DT90232 Dea PCIPLC unit is in the reverse setti
240. n gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However the system registers after No 400 become effective when the mode is changed from PROG mode to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized 15 3 15 1 1 Table of System Registers for FPOR ee value 15 4 eee ioe ee counter Hold type area starting number setting for timer and counter 1008 O to 1024 T32 F32 Hold type area starting number T32 F32 Hold type area starting number setting for data registers 0 to 32765 T32 F32 ladder process Non hold Hold Non hold T32 F32 Previous value is held for a leading edge detection Hold Hold instruction DF instrucion with Non hold MC Note number for PC PLC link relays O to 64 for PC PLC link 0 T32 F32 Hold type area starting word for PC PLC li
241. n The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Tool port R900E communication Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred error Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system Constant scan R900F storila register 34 during constant scan execution g This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34 A Available N A Not available R900D 15 10 WR901 FPOR Relay No Name Description R9011 Always off relay Always off S R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan Initial on type Goes on for only the first scan after operation RUN has been pulse relay started and goes off for the second and subsequent scans Initial off type Goes off for only the first scan after operation RUN has been R9014 pulse relay started and goes on for the second and subsequent scans SLEP AC AGEIMINA Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the pulse relay on step ladder control type R9016 R9017 Notused 0 01 s clock Repeats on off operations in LIJ R9018 pulse relay 0 01 sec cycles pore 0 02 s clock Repeats on off operations in r LJ R9019 pulse relay 0 02 s cycles pop 0 1 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 1 Y LJ R901A relay s cycles KEFY 0 2 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 2 U R901B relay s cycles KEFY 1 s clock pulse Repeats on
242. n 13 1 fel Table Or SPCCHICANOMS 2 675 6i 1c scckeeen tet yeeros e aa stetes ad ES 13 2 13 2 VO Number Al CatiO Misc n casicee steeds ainasel a tes 13 8 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constantts ccccscccecsseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeees 13 10 13 4 Power Supply Unit and I O Link Unit Specifications ceeee 13 11 14 DIMENSIONS and OMENS siseescesecsssevecssssecccsnsecsssewecseeseeeeeeeees 14 1 LAs At TOMMCI SIONS cxcxtectsec slat toons sen ne a 2 aadiadahenseeioeaucind 14 2 14 2 Cable Adapter Specifications ccccccccssecccseeeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeees 14 7 POP DIC IG K ina 15 1 15 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 15 2 15 2 Table of Basic Instructions 0c c cee ec ec ecececececececececeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeeeaeas 15 39 15 3 Table of High level Instructions cccecccceceseeeeeneeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeens 15 47 154 Table of Error cod s eenaa a a a a 15 67 15 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands cceeeeseseeeeees 15 80 15 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD ccccccccseccseeeceeeeseeeeaeeeseueesseeseeesaneesaees 15 81 15 7 ASCII Codes Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use the unit in the following environme
243. n PDDTR specified by S 1 S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register bank processing instructions F410 Setting the SETB n Index register 10 to ID bank P410 index register PSETB number change over bank number F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register 10 to ID bank P411 index register PCHGB number change over with bank number remembering preceding bank number Restoring the POPB Changes index register 10 to ID index register PPOPB bank number back to the bank ba bank number me before F411 CHGB P41 1 PCHGB instruction File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change register bank pee 7 over number Changing the File register bank number change P415 file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding bank number bank number F416 Restoring the PBFL Changes file register bank P416 file register PPBFL number back to the bank before bank number al F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL instruction Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later only 2 This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP 32k type 3 This instruction is not available for FP10SH 15 66 15 4 Table of Error codes W Difference in ERROR display There are dif
244. ndition of the previous control instruction was reset and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE JP or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding this point lt Example 1 gt Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions AO e 0 A O HDF 3 MCE Time chart 1 xO Al YO X1 was on when x0 became off The input condition 1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 AQ AT Y x1 was off when i x0 became off The input condition 41 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is obtained lt Example 2 gt Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions RO F 1 xO CT 100 x1 LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO AO Counting operation Final timing at which the J The count is not incremented because the final timing at which the previous JP instruction previous JP instruction was not executed has not been change and was not executed the execution condition XO for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 RO O Counting operation f
245. ne sampling 16 bits 3 data Sampling capacity No of samples accumulable 300 samples C10 C14 C16 1000 samples C32 T32 F32 Types of sampling timing When an instruction is executed or at regular time intervals 1 Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms 2 Sampling by F155 SMPL instruction Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction Also more than one sampling can be executed in one scan Timing for the execution of the F155 SMPL instruction can be set by the ladder sequence lt is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155 SMPL instruction simultaneously How to stop sampling Methods of the stop trigger request Following two methods are available 1 Deactivate request by the tool software 2 Deactivate request by the F156 STRG instruction If the stop trigger activates the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified number of delay and then stop the sampling operation Once the sampling operation stops the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart The number of samples before and after the trigger point can be adjusted by the number of delay When using the 32 point type with the initial settings number of samples 1000 number of delay 100 the number of samples before and after the trigger point is 900 and 1000 respectively 10 3 Operation image of sampling trace Trace
246. ness cable at 20 C Belden 9207 Shielded Shield 0 5 mm Sve Hitachi Cable twisted con AWG20 y Ltd KPEV i ductor H thylene 0 5 mm t 5 pair or greater S0 5 mm x 1P Note 0 5 mm l Polychl os cee Approx VCTF 0 5 AW G20 i rinated 2 0 6mm 6 2mm mm x 2C JIS or greater biphenyl Use shielded twisted pair cables Use only one type of transmission cable Do not mix more than 1 type Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line grounded one end If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of RS485 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 mm 5 7 4 Baud Rate Setting RS485 Type Confirm the baud rate setting before installation when using the COM port The factory default setting is 115200 bps Baud rate switches 19 200bps CSFII line i Invalid cma EI me 5 18 5 8 Safety Measures 5 8 1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design On the system using PLC malfunction may occur for the following reasons Power on timing differences between the PLC and input output or mechanical power apparatus Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs Abnormality in the PLC unit external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate saf
247. ng the registers DT90233 ii System regis 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the Unit ter 42 and 43 home unit mentioned in the left column will i System regis be changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the Elves Seg ee system register 46 will be set as it is le System regis Also the system registers 40 to 45 DT90235 j ter 46 and 47 corresponding to other units will be System regis changed to the values which the received DT90236 ter 40 and 41 values are corrected and the registers 46 PC PLC System regis and 57 in the home unit are set for the DT90237 link ter 42 and 43 registers 46 and 47 Unit No 5 or 13 DT90239 ystem regis ter 46 and 47 15 32 FPOR A Available N A Not available ee Ing Ing PC PLC link Unit station No 6 or 14 PC PLC link Unit sta tion No 7 or 15 PC PLC link Unit sta tion No 8 or 16 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings partaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below lt Example gt when DT90219 is 0 Higher byte Lower byte proo0to
248. nication The FPOR and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external units the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data FPOR SS Data register DT H r Transmitted datal P Data transmission using F159 MTRN Received data Commercial converter RS485 Data is received into receive buffer Data is sent and received B B E through the data registers System register settings No Name SetValue No 412 Selection of communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist Starting address for receive buffer C10 14 16 DTO to DT12314 ee C32 T32 F32 DTO to DT32764 Default setting Tool port DT 4096 COM port DTO No 417 Receive buffer capacity N 0 to 2048 words No 421 Note1 The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices Note2 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed For using the RS485 type make the same setting as that of the baud rate switches 19200 or 115200 bps Note3 No 416 and 417 is the COM port No 420 and 421 is the tool port 7 31 7 5 10 Settings in Compatibilit
249. nk 1 T32 F32 for PC PLC link registers 0 to 128 for PC PLC link 0 T32 F32 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC link 1 T32 F32 duplicated output verification error occurs operation error occurs communication ms Communication timeout setting o soiosieonme for SEND RECV RMRD RMWT ee l 10 to 81900 ms commands Constant value settings for scan Normal o 0 to 600 ms Scans once each time scan pa l specified time interval FPOR Default eee Descriptions value 0 to 64 words O to 128 words 0 to 63 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words Range of link relays used for PC PLC link Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link Starting word number for link relay transmission 7 Starting number for link data 0 to 127 register tranmission data register transmission 0 to 127 words PC PLC link switch flag 4 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO PC PLC link One Range of link relays used for 50 PIPEC ink o _ e104 words ot Range of link data registers Sanaa used for PC PLC link PC Starting word number for link PLC relay transmission 64 to 127 link 1 53 Link relay transmission size _ Q f0Oto64words _ _ ia reger rameson oos 18 12810285 CS ET ee or MEWNETWO PG PLO ik 15 5 FPOR Name Default value Do not set input X0 as high speed counter Two phase input X0 X1 Two phase input X0 X1 Reset input X2 Incremental input X0 CHO Increm
250. nome TR eens PT lt lt i rT AOIO J ommen A i ooo link carpet di General purpose communications Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled Enter the settings for the various items Data lenght bit 7 bits 8 bits Data lenght aay check none with odd with even bit 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Parity check The following setting is valid only when with odd the communication mode specified by Stop bit 1 bit system register 412 has been set to l General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist STX exist Communication format setting Communication 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps speed Baud rate 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps setting 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data 4096 0 to 32764 communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode 410 Unit No setting 1 1 to 99 Computer link Communication General purpose serial communication mode setting Computer link Bc PLC link MODBUS RTU Selection of modem Enter the settings for the various items Data lenght bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial
251. npub Output devices __ Control __ umit Insulated DC power supply Measures regarding power supply sequence The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the input output power supplies If the input output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit the unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation Be sure to supply power to the control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both 5 6 5 2 2 Grounding In situations of excess noise Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Q The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device O CORRECT X INCORRECT Other device FPOR Inverter etc Other device Inverter etc Note Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Since the power supply line of the FPO FPOR expansion unit is connected to the function
252. nput Voltage output type Sensor Input terminal FPOR Internal Power supply for input Precaution when using LED equipped reed switch Olnput terminal FPOR Two wire type sensor Internal Sensors leakage current mA R Bleeder resistor k amp The off voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value of bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 W The input impedance is 9 1 k amp 9 1R Ix a 2a Therefore 91R R 21 84 RS iki 9 11 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor is _ Power supply voltage R W In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W 5 8 NPN open collector output type FPOR e ec te T L eircurt Power supply for input Two wire output type Sensor Internal circuit Power supply for input When a LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED equipped reed switch make sure that the voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than the ON voltage In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown on the left The formula is based on an input impedance of 9 1 kQ The input imped
253. nter CH4 Incremental input X6 Do not set input Decremental input X6 X6 as high speed Two phase input X6 X7 counter Individual input X6 X7 Incremental decremental control input X6 X7 Does not set input X4 as high speed counter High speed counter pulse output settings X6 to X7 settings 2 High speed counter CH5 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Note1 If the operation mode is set to Two phase incremental decremental or incremental decremental control the setting for CH1 or CH3 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CH5 is invalid in system register 401 Note2 If reset input settings overlap the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401 Note3 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the follwing precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch gt Interrupt input lt Example gt When the high speed counter is being used in the addition input mode even if input XO is specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and XO functions as counter input for the high speed counter Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Incremental input X7 Decremental input X7 Controller input 15 6 FPOR Default Descriptions value Normal output YO Y1 Pulse output YO Y1 Pulse output YO Y1 Home input X4
254. nts Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100 mm or more Static electricity Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Power supply Use a power supply wire that is twisted The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using an isolating transformer before supplying the power Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as fuse If an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion unit from a single power supply Turning on off of the power of all the units m
255. o 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when eee is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in R906C PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when pee is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in R906D PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in R906E PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC d Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in R906F PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when open is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode A Available N A Not available 15 15 WR907 FPOR Name Description Turns on when Unit No 1 is in the RUN mode ae Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode wl Turns on when Unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode ao Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode ae Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is in the RUN mode en Turns o
256. o PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error Or execute a check or compile using FPWIN Pro to determine the location of the syntax error lt For error code is 20 or higher gt Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Using FPWIN GR FPWIN Pro Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared e In the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Key Point When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens click on the Operation Err button in the Status display dialog box and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 11 2 2 If ERROR LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been activated Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on e If the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on again there is p
257. ock Type cccccccsccsseceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeseeesseeceeenaes 5 13 5 6 Wiring of Molex Connector Type cccccseccceeseeceeeeseeeeseesesseeeseeeesseeees 5 15 5 7 NVINING OF GO MEP OM aces sa cee arnt scat eanct a Mal tate hot maha corals 5 16 5 8 Saey WIEASUNGS ornans aa A E E a went Atuseacsa nets 5 19 6 Preparation of USB Port sensnsensnnennnnennnnonnnnonennennnnennnnnnnnnnne 6 1 621 SB GOMMeCCUO MN pai a eos dil tae el Goat el itoels 6 2 F CORMAN G AUN ciis 7 1 TA FUNCUONS ANG TV DCS erpii e aai 7 2 722 GOMMUNICAIOMIPON TYDE rina Giese alone a eee es ote eet 7 4 7 3 COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS ccccecccceeeeceeeeceeeecaeeeeceeesseeeeseeeeaaeeesees 7 5 TA Go 9 016 sal Gemeente ne ee en eee ee ne 7 7 7 5 General purpose Serial COMMUNICATION cccsecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeees 7 18 LO F OUP US WHI PUINCUOM rec g sacar erat co eeeie soiree Meet oe PaO ae ck na 7 34 7 7 MODBUS RTU Communication cccccceeceseecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteneeseeeeaees 7 49 8 High speed Counter Pulse Output and PWM Output PING OWNS sssini AREER REEERE ESEE 8 1 8 1 Overview of Each FUNCIONS tacecseceiclesee se eeeenfatsnoscaiewetieide cia icieteo 8 2 8 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 4 8 3 High speed Counter FUNCTION cccccecccseeeceeeeeeeeeeceeesseeeeseeesseeeseeeeeas 8 9 84 Pulse Output FURCION sisses a e ai 8 19 8 5 PWM Ou
258. ode of the sampling configurations to TRACE Set the sampling rate time to 0 Mode TRACE Cancel Sampling Times roo Times 100 1000 TE Help fi p mec M0 30000 Delap Times 100 Times 1 999 3 Read data by trigger 1 Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2 on the time chart display of FPWIN GR The data will be indicated in the time chart Stop monitoring Stop with the uA button stop by the Trigger Break in the menu or stop by the F156 instruction FPWIN GR 7 Read Trace data Sure Read Sample Trace Window Reading sample trace data Please wait for a while c Reference lt FPWIN GR Help gt 10 5 10 3 Time Constant Processing The input time constants for 16 points of the CPU input X0 to XF can be set by the system registers 430 to 433 If this setting is specified an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed By the setting the noises or chattering of input will be removed CXn Input signal of Xn contact Xn Image memory of input Xn CXn Timer processing Xn Setting value System S register setting value Timer processing Setting value System register setting value Aes ner Note The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I O update If the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant proce
259. off operations in 1 s U R901C relay cycles ETE 2 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 2 s Lf R901D relay cycles ET min clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 1 Bm relay min cycles E R901F_ Notused A Available N A Not available 15 11 WR902 FPOR Relay No _Name sSCSCSCSCCCCC SDecription _ _ _ Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG R3020 nen mode nag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9024 Notused R9026 oOo flag Turns on while the F149 _ instruction is executed a a DOO Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay pee Forcing mag timer counter contacts R902B a EA Turns on when an interrupt error occurs Sampling by the instruction 0 end flag When the sampling operation starts 0 me aene eeaeee O trigger flag When the sampling stop trigger stops 0 R902A Interrupt enable Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL flag instruction Sampling enable When sampling starts 1 flag When sampling stops 0 A Available N A Not available 15 12 WR903 FPOR Turns on when the general purpose communication function is being used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL COM or the PLC link function is being used execution flag On Execution is in progress during the RUN operation complete flag Notused fe Notused COM port communication mode COM port communication erro
260. ogram The actual acceleration deceleration time is relatively shorter than the specified acceleration deceleration time Each section between the initial soeed and the maximum speed 50 kHz and between the maximum speed 50 kHz and the initial speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed Therefore the acceleration deceleration is not as smooth compared to other control patterns especially when the target speed is low To use in a low speed area with a device such as a stepping motor select the trapezoidal control Type 0 After the execution of the instruction the speed can be changed within the range of the maximum speed 50 kHz Deceleration Frequency Acceleration Deceleration time in program time in program time in program og pital aa aai a abe hata eae Calculates the secton Target speed l Calculates the section hia i between 50kHz and e aai anaa A E Calculates the section initial speed and 50kHzas f initial speed as speed change between SOkHz and speed table of 30 steps table of 30 steps initial speed as speed Calculates the section between A table of 30 steps initial speed and SOkHz as speed table of 30 steps Target Targetspeed _ speed Before speed Accelerates with each Decelerates swath each change step assigned en step assign ween i Initial __ gt intal speed and target tanet speed and initial Initial gt a th ned in each sec
261. om the initial soeed to the maximum speed 50 kHz as acceleration time and the time from the maximum speed 50 kHz to the initial speed as deceleration time in the program The actual acceleration deceleration time is relatively shorter than the specified acceleration deceleration time Each section between the initial speed and the maximum speed 50 KHz and between the maximum speed 50 kHz and the initial speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed Therefore the acceleration deceleration is not as smooth compared to other control patterns especially when the target speed is low Frequency Acceleration time in program Frequency Acceleration time In program Deceleration time in program Deceleration time m program a Teenmaanne r eo 5OkHz g y Cakulates the section Target speed Calculates the section between between SOkHz and After speed eliminate sia lenient i Calculates the section intial speed and SOkHz as initial speed as speed change between SOkHz and speed table of 30 steps lable of 30 steps h initial speed as speed l table of 30 steps Calculates the secton between initial speed and SOKHz as speed table of 30 steps Target speed _ po Before speed j N Accelerates with each Decelerates with each change Initial step assigned between step assigned between sin i EEs
262. on WR900 FPOR Relay No Name Description R9000 Self diagnostic Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs error flag The content of self diagnostic error is stored in DT90000 R9001 Notused R9002 R9003 Notused R9004 0 verification Turns on when an I O verification error occurs error flag R9005 Notused R9006 Notused J S O mar Qpwaten ever Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error occurs R9007 The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 flag hold ee l i i indicates the first operation error which occurred Operation error Turns on for an instant when an operation error Occurs R9008 flag non hold gt The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison R900B instructions F60 to F63 when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in the Auxiliary timer timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM auxiliary timer instruction flag instructio
263. on of numbers for input output relays Since input relay X and output relay Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below X Decimal 1 2 3 9 Hexadecimal 4 2 I O Allocation for FPOR Control Unit 4 2 1 O Numbers of FPOR Control Unit The I O allocation of FPOR control unit is fixed C14 C16 Input 8 points XO to X7 Output 8 points YO to Y7 Input 16 points XO to XF 2 T32 F32 Fee Ween Output 16 points YO to YF 4 3 4 3 V O Numbers of FP0 FPOR Expansion Unit 1 O numbers do not need to be set as I O allocation is automatically performed when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location Toe olun Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion yP allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40to Y43 Y60 to Y63 a i Output 8 points Y20to Y27 Y40 to Y47_ Y60 to Y67 Sead a z o X60 to X67 i Y40 to Y47 i X40 to X4F wxe2 WX4 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F FPO Analog O WX3 WX5 unit i X30 to X3F X50 to X5F WY2 WY4 v20 to Y2F o to Y4F FPO A D i conversion unit i oeo to X2F oo to X4F FPO Thermocouple i Input 16 points unit CH1 3 5 7 ie to X3F xao to X5F oe to X2F oo to X4F FPO RTD unit FPO RTD on to X
264. ons 40 Transmission distance m Note3 The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be the same Only 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Factory default Port type Datalength Parity Stop bit Tool port 9600 bit s 8Bbits Odd tit Odd tb COM port RS485 port 115200 bit s IES er Note If the potential difference between the power supplies of R8485 devices exceeds 4 V the unit may not communicate as it is the non isolated type The large potential difference leads to the damage to the devices 13 7 13 2 I O Number Allocation 13 2 1 I O Numbers for FPOR Control Unit The I O allocation for the FPOR control unit is fixed VO No at XO to X5 YO to Y3 u XO to X7 Output 6 points YO to Y5 C16 Input 8 points XO to X7 Output 8 points YO to Y7 XO to XF Input 16 points 2 T32 F32 ee ene Output 16 points YO to YF 13 8 13 2 2 I O Numbers for FPO Expansion Unit e O numbers do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an expansion I O unit is added e The I O allocation for expansion units is determined by the installation location Expansion Expansion Expansion Input 8 po
265. ons can be executed or not Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed During executing the instruction On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed COM port Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of SEND RECV the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions as follows instruction Off No abonormality detected execution end On An abnormality detected communication error End code DT90124 COM port SEND RECV instruction execution flag R904A_ Notused J R904B_ Notused omooer Motu to R904F A Available N A Not available Note R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan WR905 _ FPOR MEWNET WO PLC link When using MEWNET WO Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings error flag R9051 to R905F transmission 15 14 WR906 FPOR Relay No Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9060 link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9061 link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9062 link O mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC Turns on
266. or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Q Available Not available Not available partially 15 45 Floating point type real number data compare Start FPO FP e Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 per bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 H5 2 aa S2 1 S2 TARIE Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 aol lt S S bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 am e7 51 52 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S24 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 or S141 S 1 S24 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S24 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 or S14 1 S1 S24 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact TT erasures l EIE l SA i l Gg i ES pew e 1 82 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the point comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 type real ANFes Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the number comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 data or
267. or code will be stored here so that the content of the error can be checked 0 1 R G1 2 0 amp R a L If the read command was used the data that was read is stored here If normal Command name If error occurs Error Response code If normal ASCII code H24 If error occurs ASCII code H21 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in Sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text 5 Terminator End code There is always a Cp ASCII code HOD at the end of the message Note When reading If no response is returned the communication format may not be correct or the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications e g baud rate data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC If the response contains an instead of a the command was not processed successfully The response will contain a communication error code Check the meaning of the error code Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response see pais This makes the ae between a command and a response clear Same lt gt Same ra 7 10 Commands to be used Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifi
268. ostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of self diagnostic error codes E MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 15 68 15 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera tion Description and steps to take status A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Duplicated Change to PROG mode and correct the output program so that one relay error is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position error Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For Parameter example the number setting in a program does mismatch not agree with t
269. ot supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDS are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool e f the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input output function e f the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check e f the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals e f the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the power is not supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool e f the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the prog
270. ounter F178 PLSM instructions R9114 R9115 control flag CHSC CH4 Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is HSC CH4 completed ee we R911F Paa Pulse output Turns on while the pulses are being output using instruction F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F173 PWMH F174 SPOH R9122 z flag 175 SPSH F177 HOME instructions Barlam n R912F Turns on the channel of pulse output during the control R9131 Pulse output PLS CH1 using F166 HC1S F167 HC1R instructions control flag PLS CH2 Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is PLS CH3 completed R9134 to R913F A Available N A Not available 15 19 15 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FPOR FPOR A Available N A Not available Adress name Description Rm ing ing DT90000 Self diagnostic error The self diagnostic error code is stored here N A code when a self diagnostic error occurs gt SSS lao S e S S S S S S gt Se ea oe S S S S gt gt gt Z gt When the state of installation of FPO expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to Extension right side the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary DT90010 I O verify error unit display 0 to 3 3210 Bit No 3210 Unit No ON 1 Error OFF 0 Normal z gt DT90011 Notused DT90012 Notused DT90013 Notused _ gt gt
271. owards X Y amp Z directions Nose mmuni 1000 V P P with pulse width 50 ns 1us using a noise simulator y Power supply terminal Operating condition Must be free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Overvoltage category Category Il Pollution level Pollution level 2 Weight C10 100 g C14 105 g C16 85 g C32 115 g T32 115 g F32 120g 13 2 Unit s current consumption table Control unit current This is the current consumed from the control unit power supply connector If expansion units or intelligent units are added the current is increased by the value indicated below Expansion unit current potion This is the current consumed from the expansion unit power supply connector If a unit is not listed below it means that it has no power supply connector Input circuit current This is the current consumed by the input circuits of the various units This value indicates the current that flows into the input circuit Output circuit current consumption This is the current consumed by the output circuits of the various units This value indicates the current used to drive the output circuits This value does not include the load current value FPOR C10 100mAorless 159 mAorless FPOR C14 120mAorless 2t 4mAorless FPOR C16 70 mA or less e 21 1 mA or less 20 mA or less FPOR C32 90 mA or less 42 2 mA or less 40 mA or less FPOR T32 FPO E8X 10 mA or les
272. ower order byte in S 1 of the table During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 turns off If system register 413 is set to header start code with STX the header is automatically added to the beginning of the data The terminator end code specified in system register 413 is automatically added to the end of the data DTial D102 DT103 DT104 Transmission data DIE Fi G H p ON OFF R9039 Execution condition RO F159 MTRN execution During transmission During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed ON OFF 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted the S value is cleared to 0 and the transmission done flag R9039 turns on When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data set system register 413 to Terminator None Programming example The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator Ad Hor _ _ gt i 1 gt F159 MTRN DTi00 K 8 K 1 7 g Key Point Do not include the terminator end code in the transmission data The terminator is added automatically When STX exist is specified for the header start code in system register 413 do not add the header to the transmission data
273. peed counter channel when using the high speed counter function The pulse number to be measured is counted in a specified counting cycle The one pulse on off cycle right after the execution of the instruction is measured as the pulse cycle Note The last numbers of the actual measured values may vary due to the measurement error R9013 Fo mv H630 DT100 even ial Fo MV K 100 DT 100 Storage location of measured pulse number R3 DT200 DT201 H F178 PLSM DT 100 DT101 DT 200 No of moving average of measured pulse number Once Measurement cycle of measured pulse number 100ms Pulse cycle measurement by 1us and 1 ms Storage location of measured pulse cycle 1 us unit DT202 to DT203 Storage location of measured pulse cycle 1 ms unit DT204 to DT205 Measurement limit of measured pulse cycle 1ms unit 2s Operation of F178 instruction In case of the above sample program Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction execution execution execution execution Scan time gt Scan time gt lt Scan tim 4 Scan time meeesee pulse number is stored in DT200 and DT201 Cycle of counting pulse number between 1 ms and 5 s in ed High speed ae ial i ie i 7 E 3 HO Input pulse t i i ic a e Time When no pulse is measured Measured Measured Measured for 174 7 ms or more 1 is pulse cycle pulse cycle pulse cycle stored In UT ae and D1293
274. peed to the maximum speed 50 kHz is specified as acceleration time or deceleration time When the target speed is below 50 kHz the acceleration time processed in the PLC is relatively shorter than the time specified in a program The same is true for the deceleration time Use the type 1 to change the speed to a speed faster than the target speed after the execution of the instruction After the execution the speed up to the maximum speed 50 kHz can be changed Acceleration time Deceleration time Speed can be changed specified in program specified in program the one Max 50 KHz i i i i faster than the target sp i i i SOkHZ E E night after the execution Target speed e 58 Target speed a er d Target speed m After speed change Initial speed i L E i a i i 7 i speed change command Acceleration time Deceleration time Rewrite the set target speed calculated in PLE calculated in PLE Note For the details of the difference in acceleration deceleration characteristics refer to 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions 8 36 Sample program Trapezoidal control Type 0 F171 The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from YO with the following conditions Initial soeed 1 kHz Target speed 10 kHz Acceleration time 100 ms Deceleration time 1000 ms Movement amount 30000 pulses Timin
275. pply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as fuse Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally 9 20 Chapter 6 Preparation of USB Port 6 1 USB Connection 6 1 1 Precautions when connecting PLC with USB port Note the following restriction for using a personal computer and PLC with USB connection PLC type Applicable OS FPWIN GR version FP X Windows 98 2 5 or later Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista FPOR Windows 2000 2 8 or later Windows XP Windows Vista FP X FPOR Windows 7 2 9 or later Do not connect a computer to PLC with USB before installing FPWIN GR When connecting a personal computer to PLC with USB the dialog boxes as below may be displayed If the FPWIN GR has not been installed click Cancel to close these dialog boxes Windows XP Windows 98SE Add New Hardware Wizard Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard searches for new drivers for Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard C
276. put is immediately stopped When the forced stop request flag bit 3 of DT90052 is one instructions cannot be executed Specification of initial speed and speed error Common to F171 F172 F174 F175 F177 Note that there are the following characteristics according to the initial speed specified with each instruction 1 When the initial speed is 1 Hz or higher and lower than 46 Hz the control can be performed up to 10 KHz 2 When the initial speed is 46 Hz or higher and lower than 184 Hz the control can be performed up to the maximum frequency 3 When the initial soeed is 184 Hz or higher the control can be performed up to the maximum frequency The speed error will be smallest Control code and quick start Common to F171 F172 F175 When Calculation only is specified in the digit to set the output of the control code of each instruction the pulse output is not performed Instructions can be quickly started when executing them for the same channel and with the same parameter after executing calculation only v Duty cycle of pulse output Common to F171 F172 F174 F175 F177 Pulses are output with a 25 duty cycle 8 56 8 5 PWM Output Function 8 5 1 Overview PWM output function With the F173 PWMEH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained System register setting In order to use the PWM output function it is necessary to set system register numbe
277. puter has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent Computer Transmission program Reception processing program 4 The unit number of the PLC Check Termi _ that sent the response 5 Confirmation of whether or not the processing was carried out successfully T The unit number of the PLC 6 The type of command to which the command is _ Processed being sent L If the command was used to read data the data that was read lf an error occurred and the command could not be 2 The type of command 3 Any settings and data required in order to execute raii o miia the command processed successfully the vV content of the error The command and data are v sent to the PLC with the specified unit number A response is returned and processed by the computer e g the computer retrieves the data that was sent Format of command and response Command message All command related items should be noted in the text segment The unit number must be specified before sending the command Header Unit no of destination 01 to 99 decimal Text Content depends on type of command Check code BCC hexadecimal Terminator s j Two One 4 digit digit Lace that reads the value internal relay R1 Specified item S specifies that only 1 point should be read L name e g
278. r flag COM port reception done flag during general purpose communication COM port transmission done flag during general purpose serial communication TOOL port reception done flag during general purpose communication TOOL port transmission done flag during general purpose serial communication Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication Turns on the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication A Available N A Not available Note R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan 15 13 WR904_ FPOR Relay wet MRRY name espn TOOL port Turns on when the general purpose communication function is being R9040 operation mode used flag Goes off when the computer link function is being used R9041 COM port PLC Turn on while the PLC link function is used link oe R9042 Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructi
279. r Windows XP Select My computer gt View System information gt Hardware tab gt Device Manager 3 Double click Ports COM amp LPT As the table of allocation of COM ports is shown confirm the COM port number Panasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual UART COMn is the allocated COM port COM4 is allocated in the following display Es Device Manager Seles File Action View Help mFS 2 ALRA za FPOR 4 Computer Sao Disk drives Display adapters DVD CD ROM drives a Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives Ba Human Interface Devices IDE ATAJATAPT controllers keyboards Mice and other pointing devices ig Monitors BB Network adapters Ports COM amp LPT oe Communications Port coun i c Electric 4 ks PLE piip z pisi 450 E TL aa We Printer Port LPT1 Ps Processors g SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers a Storage volumes 6 1 4 Communication with Programming Tool The following communication setting should be specified to perform the communication with a programming tool FPWIN GR FPWIN Pro using the USB 1 Display the Communication Setting window from the programming tool lt Using FPWIN GR gt Select Communication Setting under Option from the menu bar lt Using FPWIN Pro gt Select Communication Setting under Online from the menu bar Communication Setting Untrtlel 7 f x Network type C NET R52320
280. r con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to is stored in D DFIX PDFIX p o Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D ROFF PROFF p o Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D DROFF PDROFF Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to integer Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point down Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point off Floating point F type data sign PF changes Floating point type data absolute by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D FINT PFINT po 5 The decimal part of the real number data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in D 1 D FRINT PFRINT The decimal part of the real number data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 D The real number data stored in S 1 S is changed the sign and the result is stored in D 1 D Takes
281. r equipment that would generate high switching surges 100 mm or more Static electricity Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Measures regarding heat discharge Always install the unit oriented with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat Do not install the unit as shown below INCORRECT Upside down Upside down Installations such that Input and output Horizontal the input and output connectors on top installation of the unit connectors face down Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters transformers or large scale resistors 9 2 Installation space Leave at least 50 mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm 1 97 in or more 50 mm 1 97 in or more Maintain at least 100 mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 3 937 in Le or more Panel door PLC unit Other device Leave at least 100 mm of space from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring 5 1 2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail The
282. r than the above mentioned values when the change of pulse output speed CAM control instruction target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously 8 6 Max counting speed Frequency kHz Combination with pulse output function Trapezoidal control No change in speed 50kHz Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 3 CH Pulse output 4 CH Single phase 45 7 Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the change of pulse output speed CAM control instruction target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously c M Le ee ee re ae a 8 E a a a a ae a ee a E a re Oo o 45 8 8 7 FPOR pulse output performance Independent control Single phase CHO sata ecu ea A Available ooo oS o e y O Available Availabe 0 SO Available Available Available SO O Available Available Available Available Note Even if all channels are used they can be used within the ranges above Interpolation control interpolation Maximum output frequency kHz CHO CH2 cannes speed Availabe D o Available Available 50 Note Even if all channels are used for the interpolation function they can be used within the ranges above Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the change of pulse output speed CAM control instruction target value
283. ram again Check 1 Check for the duplicated use of output Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high level instruction 2 Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used 11 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears When a password function is used Procedure Enter a password in the Set PLC Password menu FPWIN GR Security settings menu FPWIN Pro and change it to the state to enable Access Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar 2 The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed Turn on the radio button next to Access enter a password and click on the Settings button Set PLC password dialog box xl PLC Home Current status Password is not set Available retry counts 3 counts digit number Settings Close Force Cancel C 4 digits Hes 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Help m Operation Mode C Access Protect C Unprotect m 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric ik m Setting for FP memory loader option T Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Using FPWIN Pro 1 Select Security Settings under Online on the menu bar 2 The security setting dialog box shown below is displayed Input the password in the field of PLC access and click the Login button S
284. rd data 32 the area selected with S1 and S2 bit and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum value S1 Searches for the minimum value in P272 word data 16 S2 D the word data table between the area bit selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F273 Minimum value S1 Searches for the minimum value in P273 double word S2 D the double word data table between data 32 bit the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and S1 The total value and the mean value of P275 mean values S2 D the word data with sign from the area i word data 16 selected with S1 to S2 are bit obtained and stored in the D F276 Total and DMEAN S1 The total value and the mean value of P276 mean values PDMEAN S2 D the double word data with sign from double word the area selected with S1 to S2 data 32 bit are obtained and stored in the D F277 Sort word SORT S1 The word data with sign from the P277 data 16 bit PSORT S2 area specified by S1 to S2 are S3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT S1 The double word data with sign from P278 word da
285. read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command 1 Header Start code Commands must always have a ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C at the beginning of a message 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified In 1 1 communication the unit number 01 ASCII code H3031 should be specified The unit number of the PLC is specified by the system register 3 Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted in all upper case characters following the fixed formula for the particular command 4 0o01 RCS X 0 0 O11c amp 4 4 l Specification Command name and data to Command code be written ASCII code H23 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically The parity check can be skipped by entering ASCII code H2A2A instead of the BCC 5 Terminator End code Messages must always end witha Cp ASCII code HOD IEF er Note When writing The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on t
286. register x 2 5ms The minimum inerval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the sending operation is performed The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms Area used for measurement of receiving interval Area used for measurement of sending interval gt gt gt N A N A Writ ing N A N A gt N A N A N A N A FPOR A Available N A Not available ee ing ing Area used for measurement of receiving DT90159 PC PLC link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending interval MEWNET WO DT90160 PC PLC link 0 unit No Stores the unit No of PC PLC link 0 N A MEWNET WO DT90161 PC PLC link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC PLC link O flag DT90162 to DT90169 DT90170 Duplicated destination for PC PLC inter link address DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 Le al commands have MEWNET WO DT90175 PC PLC link 0 status DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of ti
287. resets the buffer writing point KO and turns off the reception done contact R9048 L The data in the receive buffer is not cleared Starting from DT100 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer 2 The reception done contact R9038 is turned on 3 The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction is executed with no data to clear the number of received bytes and to turn off the reception done contact R9038 The system is now ready to receive the next data or in the receive buffer is not cleared Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program Explanatory diagram Data register DT tate eee ee eeeeeeeneeees 3 Data reading DData reception z o beseeeeeeoeeoeoeoeeoeosoot 2 Reception done R9038 ON 4 Reception ready R9038 OFF External device 1 23 Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the communication port is stored in the data registers that have be
288. rmed up to the target speed When the position control start input becomes effective pulses are output up to a specified target value The speed can be changed by rewriting the target speed during the operation after executing the instruction Target jenin speed i Target value i Initial hee speed _ _e Deceleration time Acceleration time Execution condition Position control start input Pulse output instruction flag Type 1 Once the trigger execution condition turns on the JOG operation is started and acceleration is performed up to the target speed 1 When the position control start input becomes effective the speed is changed to the target speed 2 at a specified changeover time and pulses are output up to a specified target value The speed cannot be changed after executing the instruction When Target speed 1 gt Target speed 2 When Target speed 1 lt Target speed 2 Target w TN ia soa ete ene speed 1 speed 2 Target e A na Target Leo speed 2 ar et speed 1 Pe 4 s Pi Target value Initial m f i pense initial ae 9 2 penne inf nnn nnn pam speed Pea speed a Acceleration Changeover Deceleration time time time Execution condition Position control start input Pulse output instruction flag 8 42 _ Acceleration Changeover
289. robably an abnormality in the FPOR control unit Please contact your dealer e If the ERROR ALARm LED is flashed go to chapter 11 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode e f the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check the program Check 1 Check if instructions such as JMP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish 2 Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession 11 2 3 ALL LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is in the range of the rating e Be sure to check the fluctuation of the voltage Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is shared with them e f the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices e Please contact your dealer for further questions 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads e f the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again e f the power is n
290. rocess eves 112 to 127 adi i ji hes Step ladder process ndicates the startup condition of the step DT90068 128 to 143 ladder process When the process starts up Step ladder process the bit corresponding to the process number DT90069 144 to 159 turns on DT90070 a eee Process Monitor using binary display r A DT90071 Step ladder process lt Sxamp e gt 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No h 176 to 191 broo _ a DT90072 Step ladder process 655 t 651 sha E 643 t 640 Process No 1 92 to 207 1 During running 0 During stopping DT90073 oe pane Paena Note A programming tool software can be used to write data DT90074 Step ladder process 224 to 239 Step ladder process 240 to 255 Step ladder process penn 256 to 271 Step ladder process A 272 to 287 Step ladder process LIOS 288 to 303 DT90079 Step ladder process DT90075 304 to 319 Step ladder process peeves 320 to 335 Step ladder process icici 336 to 351 15 27 FPOR A Available N A Not available scree name een P ing ing Step ladder process peeve 352 to 367 Step ladder process PAi 368 to 383 DT90084 Step ladder process 384 to 399 Step ladder process 400 to 415 Step ladder process a Indicates the start diti f the st Step ladder process ndicates the startup condition of the step DT90087 432 to 447 ladder process When the process starts up the bit corresponding to the process number pT90088 Step ladder process
291. rom 0 08 us Timer instruction 2 2 us Operation High level instruction from 0 32us MV instruction speed Basic instruction from 0 58 us Timer instruction 3 66 us High level instruction from 1 62us MV instruction Special Internal Relay R 224 points Link Relay L 2048 points 1024 points Factory default Timer 1008 points TO to T1007 oe Counter 16 points C1008 to C1023 Data register DT 12315 words 32765 words Special data register DT 440 words DT90000 to DT90443 Available Sampling by commands Sampling at regular time intervals For one sampling 16 bits 3 words C10 C14 C16 300 samples C32 T32 F32 1000 samples High speed counter HSC At single phase 6 points Max 50 kHz or second phase 3 points Max 15 kHz Sampling trace Pulse output P 4 points Max 50 kHz PWM output L ss 4 points Max 4 8 kHz Pulse catch input 8 points in total including HSC and interrupt input Interrupt program Input 8 programs C10 only Input 6 programs Periodical 1 program Pulse match 4 Periodical interrupt 0 5 ms unit 0 5 ms to 1 5 s 10 ms unit 10 ms to 30 s 0 5 ms unit 0 5 ms to 600 ms 13 4 C10 C14 Backup by F12 4 P13Instruction All areas Counter 16 points Sneha are en Internal relay 128 points E i Data register 315 words All areas Built in 5 RAM backup backup All areas battery Se Clock Calendar Available Communication port Tool port USB port
292. rs no 402 8 5 2 PWM Output Instruction F173 X6 While X6 is on a pulse with a period of 1 ms and duty Fo mv K13 DT100 ratio of 50 is output from YO of specified channel l CHO Fo MV K500 DT101 When the program runs the data table will be as F173 PWMH DT100 KO SHOWN DEIOW Data table DT100 Control code 1 K13 DT101 Duty 2 50 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Period ms 6 16667 133 33 40 00 20 00 10 00 K10 600 K14 K15 2 Specify the duty by setting the K constant Duty KO to K999 1000 resolutions Note e If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occurred po on 2 D ulo m NI S S S Ki2 s NO O1 5 5 0 KK mc K12 Lee KIS O Oj O CO GO 8 57 8 58 Chapter 9 Security Functions 9 1 Password Protect Function 9 1 1 Password Protect Function This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a password on the FPOR There are two ways to set a password as below 1 Sets using the programming tool 2 Sets using an instruction SYS1 instruction Characters usable for password Digit number of Usable characters password 4 digit password 4 characters of
293. ry mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FPOR is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible Use Type Il instructions of F145 and F146 Type directly specifying MODBUS address to communication with MODBUS devices made by other companies Master Slave Slave Slave FPOR RS485 Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Slave function Slave function Slave function applicable applicable device device Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Master Modbus RTU Slave Slave Slave Master function applicable RS485 device FPOR FPOR FPOR 7 49 MODBUS RTU command message frame START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END _ _ 3 5 character time 16 bits 3 5 character time ADDRESS Unit No 8 bits O to 99 decimal Note1 0 Broadcast address Note2 Slave unit No is 1 to 99 decimal Note3 For MODBUS 0 to 247 decimal FUNCTION 8 bits DATA Varies depending on commands CRC 16 bits END 3 5 character time Differs depending on baud rate Refer to reception judgement time Response in normal status
294. s 87 6 mA or less FPOR control unit FPOR F32 ao ee oe lt lt FPOESYR 10mArless 100mAoriess Co o FPO ESYT P_ 15mAorless J 26 MA less FPO E16X 10mAorless 75 2 mAcrless FPO EI6R 20mAorless 100 mAorless__ 37 6mAorless e FPO FPOR expansion unit FPO E16YT P_ 25 mA orless J 52mAoles FPO E32T P_ 35 mA or less 75 2mAorless 52mAorless FPO A21 20 mA or less 100 mA orless o deo ooo o FPO A80 20mAorless 60mAorless do ooo o FPO A04V_ 20 mA or less 100 mAorless o deo ooo FPO A04 20 mA or less 130 mA orless o do ooo FPO TC4 25 mA or less FPO TC8 FPO RTD6 a a L E S Programmable display A or 5 VDC RS232C type somos f eo CNet AFP15402 50 mA or less adapter S2 FPO intelligent unit 13 3 13 1 2 Control Specifications tem C10 C144 C16 C32 T32 F32 Program memory Rewriting during Available Simultaneous rewriting capacity 512 steps RUN Download during Available All programs RUN Security function Password function 4 digit 8 digit Read protection setting Comment Memory capacity 328 kbytes All comments including I O comments annotations memory interlinear comments Available All comments RUN Without expansion units 0 2 ms or less I O update time amp base time With expansion units 0 2 ms or less 1xthe number of expansion unit ms Basic instruction f
295. s acceleration cannot be position performed 15 38 15 2 Table of Basic Instructions cet _ set ca ee MCE a OEE output inl A ad nnr E instruction D fan Ee AYRTOLPE NDNA fan EE XYRT CLPE Pre ow ST Leading edge start Trailing edge start Leading edge AND Trailing edge AND Leading edge OR Trailing edge OR Leading edge out Trailing edge out ea Alterna YRLE tive out lt Ay cc Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open contact Begins a logic operation with a Form B normally closed contact Connects a Form A normally open contact serially Connects a Form B normally closed contact serially Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel Connects a Form B normally closed contact in parallel ATRT COL AE t XY RTC LPE t X Y R T L A E Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when leading e
296. s carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and Pulse Pulse Yo PIPL PL ALA PLP PL another to specify the direction of Y2 rotation with on off signals In this OoN ON OFF mode forward rotation is carried out Rotation o Y1 direction Sign y3 when the rotation direction signals is ON Incremental counting Decremental counting 8 20 Operation mode Incremental lt Relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when Pulse output from CW direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Positive Pulse output Negative from CCW Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting Method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute lt Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when direction output is Target value greater than Pulse output current value oN OFF T
297. s the non isolated type The large potential difference leads to the damage to the devices 7 6 7 4 Computer Link 7 4 1 Overview Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave Computer mmand message Co wer Response message MEWTOCOL master function This function is to carry out the communication on the master side side that issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or Fi46 RECV It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC temperature control un
298. sed as a converter For the RS232C type COM port a RS232C RS485 conversion adapter is also required on the PLC side Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings There is no need to change this for 1 1 communication but if 1 N communication is used to connect multiple PLCs to the transmission line e g in a C NET the unit number must be specified so that the destination of the command can be identified The unit number is specified by using the system register Setting system registers No Name i Set Value No 410 Unit number 1 to 99 Set the desired unit number With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified No 412 Computer link No 413 Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Note1 The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer Note2 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction For using the RS485 type make the same setting as that of the baud rate switches 19200 or 115200 bps 7 14 7 4 6 MEWTOCOL Master Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function Communication port The MEWTOCOL master is not available for the tool port It is av
299. sed on up down input Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal relay WR data to the left Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range specified by D1 and D2 to the left or to the right The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there The program jumps to the label instruction specified by S and continues from there The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST RUN mode only FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Available Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 15 41 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH z Oo i Ml ioe er eee eee Indicates the end of a main program eae Oe rr es eer T olofofo the trigger turns on 2 me Step ladder instructions Po _ J The start of program
300. set a constant scan or insert a program that does not affect the external operation to adjust the timing How to use FPO compatibility mode Download the programs uploaded from the FPO or the programs that the model code is created as the FPO using an applicable programming tool for the FPOR A confirmation message will be shown on the tool and the mode will be automatically changed to the FPO compatibility mode Tools supporting FPO compatibility mode FPWIN GR Ver 2 80 or later FPWIN Pro Ver 6 10 or later Restrictions on switching to FPO compatibility mode For downloading the FPO programs to the FPOR in the FPO compatibility mode the model setting for the FPO programs should match the model type of the FPOR as the table below Model setting for FPO program Applicable FPOR model C10RM C10RS C10CRM C10CRS C14RM C14RS C14CRM C14CRS C16T C16P C16CT C16CP C32 C32T C32P C32CT C32CP T32 T32T T32P T32CT T32CP Differences between the specifications of FPO compatibility mode and FPO Basically the FPO programs do not need to be modified to activate the FPO programs in the FPO compatibility mode however as for the following items the specifications are different Check the contents and change the programs if necessary 1 P13 PICWT instruction specifications EEPROM FROM write instruction The execution time of this instruction differs Depending on the number of write blocks the execution time may be longer or short
301. setting is not available in FP memory loader Ver1 Note2 Although programs cannot be downloaded with FP memory loader Ver 2 or later only the upload protection setting is activated Status of PLC that program has been downloaded Status of FP memory loader Password setting for FPOR after download No password setting The password will be cleared 4 digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 4 digit password 8 digit password setting ee Limited distribution setting Off The password will be overwritten with a new 8 digit password 8 digit password setting The password will not change Limited distribution setting On The program itself will not be downloaded 9 4 Table of Security Settings Cancel For the settings on the FPOR control unit Status of security set protection password password Upload protection A A A 4 digitpassword A A _ NA Sets Cancels iii A Available N A Not available 9 12 Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 P13 PICWT Instruction Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built in ROM F ROM data area control unit using the P13 PICWT instruction Note the followings for the use 1 Restrictions on the number of writing Writing can be performed within 10000 times If writing continues for more than that the correct operation cannot be guaranteed 2 1 he power supply turns off when the P13 PICWT instruction is
302. sible neither for link relays nor for link registers Send area is split Send area Receive area Send area Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments Receive area Send area Send area Send area 7 42 Receive area Send area 7 6 5 Setting the Largest Unit Number for PC PLC Link The largest unit number can be set using system register no 47 using system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 Sample setting 1st unit Unit no 1 Is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set A largest unit no of 2 is set for each 1st unit Unit no 1 Is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set 3rd unit Unit no 3 is set 4th unit Unit no 4 is set A largest unit no of 4 is set for each n Nth unit Unit no nis set A largest unit no of n is set for each Note Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 in system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 For all PLCs which are linked the same value should be set for the largest unit number If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set default 16 or the largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive or the unit number
303. sion hooks with the mounting plate and press the hooks Installation 1443 cS vr The flat type mounting plate AFP0804 should be used only with the control unit as a stand alone unit It should not be used when the unit is being used in combination with an FPO FPOR expansion unit 9 5 5 2 Wiring of Power Supply 5 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply Use the power supply cable provided as an accessory to supply power to the unit Power supply cable AFPG805 Green Function earth Blue 0 V Power supply cable Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable Part number AFPG805 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Brown 24 V DC Blue 0 V Green Function earth Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable Power supply type To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit The regulator on the unit is a non insulated type If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit always make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse Power supply voltage Wiring system lsolate the wiring systems to the control unit input output devices and mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker Mechanical power pparatus a I
304. small type can be used only for each series of FP e FP2 FPO and FP X Conforms to IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Type of software OS Operating system Hard disk capacity Windows 2000 inte ia ene Windows XP 100MB or more AFPS50560 neg Windows Vista Note1 The small type and upgrade version is not available for Ver 6 Note2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site http www panasonic electric works com peweu en html 22164 php Use the latest version 1 8 Type of computer and suitable cable For the connection between a personal computer RS232C and the control unit RS232C D sub connector cable Bee aice PLC side connector Specifications Product No connector D sub 9 pin Female Mini DIN round 5 pin L type 3 m AFC8503 j Female Mini DIN round 5 pin Straight type 3 m AFC8503S Note A USB RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a serial port using a PC connection cable For the connection between a personal computer USB and the control unit USB USB cable Use a commercial cable Cable type USB 2 0 cable A miniB Max 5m Note Windows 2000 or later OS is required for the communication with a USB USB A type Male USB miniB type 5 pin Male PC side PLC side 1 9 Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit 2 1 Part Names and Functions 2 1 1 Part Names and Funct
305. ssing the time constant processing will be invalid and the input status at the time will be read out and set The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than XO to XF add on cassettes or expansion units by the F182 FILTR instruction The timer instruction is not used for the timer processing in this equivalent circuit The time constant processing is invalid when the high speed counter pulse catch or interrupt has been specified Input time constant setting function and applicable models sepia register Control unit input Applicable model I O No gt i 0 C14 C16 C32 T32 F32 ee XO to X3 A o 43100 Xox woa X8 to XB XC to XF A Available N A Not available 10 6 Chapter 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 Self Diagnostic function 11 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition How to read status indicator LEDs on control unit LED status Pun PROG A ARM sta status ALARM Normal Light Con Normal operation Fight on PROG mode ee Forcing inpuvoutput in Run mode Light on Self diagnostic error Operation is running Operation Abnormal Light on Self diagnostic error Operation stops conaiton Light on Light on Light System watchdog timer has been S top or off or off on activated e The control unit has a self diagnostic function which EE identifies errors and stops operation if necessary indicator LED e When an error occurs the status of the
306. status indicator LEDs on the control unit vary as shown in the table above ot ho a dn ee i poooo000 aoooooee A f Oo 11 1 2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs Normally when an error occurs the operation stops When the duplicated output error or operation error occurs the user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped by setting the system registers You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below PLC System Register setting menu on programming tool software To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs select PLC System Register setting under Option on the menu bar and click on the Action on Error tab The screen shown below is displayed PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold Action on Error j No 20 Disable settings for duplicated output Time Link WO 0 Link 0 1 Controller input settings HSC Controller output settings PLS 7PM Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings iV No 26 Stop when an operation error occurs Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Tool Port COM Port j No 23 Stop when an 1 0 verification error occurs Cancel Initialize Help Example1 When allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No 20 When operation is resumed it will not be handled as an error Example2 When
307. stem register Note2 5 Max 99 units pro OLCONNECIEG UNIES Max 32 units when our C ENT adapter is connected Computer link master slave Modem initialization Communication function General purpose serial communication Modbus RTU Master Slave PC PLC link Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below For baud rate 115 2 kbps For baud rate 19 2 kbps 99 Number of units stations 40 0 700 1200 Transmission distance m Note3 The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be the same Only 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Factory default settings Port type Data length Parity Stopet 9600 bit s 8Bbits Odd tit COM port RS485 115200bit s 8bits Odd tit Note If the potential difference between the power supplies of RS485 devices exceeds 4 V the unit may not communicate as it i
308. ster When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag R9038 turns on and subsequently receiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F144 TRNS instruction and turn the reception done flag R9038 off to clear the number of received bytes to 0 To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 set n to KO and then execute the F144 TRNS instruction 1 32 Setting Communication Parameters Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FPO Usable communication port COM port RS232C port COM port RS232C port settings Dialog box of PLC system register setting xl Hold Non hold Action on Error No 412 Port Selection tio Time High Speed Counter m No 413 Communication Format No 414 Baudrate Interrupt Input eBt zr Tool Port Char bit 8 Bits X 3600 Parity Check Odd as No 415 Unit No Stop Bit fi fi Teminator CR Zl F host Modem Enabled Header STX not exist No 417 Receive Buffer Starting Address DT fo 0 1659 No 418 Receive Buffer Capacity 1660 0 1660 Cancel Initialize Help No 412 Communication mode Select General communication No 413 Communication Format setting Char Bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator End code CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist STX
309. struction Tis 7 x Ttx Sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 48 x4 71 bytes Tpc Itx x Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82ms_ Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms 7 45 Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 15 4 13 ms Tik 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms
310. t ieee input pulse counting parenthesis is flag value area value area aap Note2 Note1 width speed reset input CHO X2 R9110 to to DT90301 DT90303 on DT90306 ae el fem i ee DT90307 X3 DT90308 DT90310 Single phase CH2 X5 R9112 to to kania DT90309 DT90311 10 Decremenial XA DT90312 DT90314 CH3 X5 R9113 to to DT90313 DT90315 CH4 X6 DT90316 DT90318 Note3 None R9114 to to DT90317 DT90319 CH5 Da DT90322 Note3 pies R9115 to ma DT90323 DT90300 DT90302 2 phase X2 DT90301 DT90303 2 phase input X3 DT90308 DT90310 One input X4 to to Direction X5 DT90309 DT90311 distinction X6 oe DT90316 DT90318 Note3 X7 R9114 to to None DT90317 DT90319 Note1 The reset input X2 can be set to either CHO or CH1 The reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3 The inputs X4 to X7 are also used for the home input of the pulse output function It is necessary to set how to use each input by system registers Note2 For information on minimum input pulse width also refer to lt 8 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width gt Note3 CH4 and CH5 cannot be used for the C10 type Note4 The maximum counting speed is the values when executing with the conditions of each item counting method or number of channels only These values are not available if executing the high speed counter match ON OFF instruction other pulse I O process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program High speed counter channel No 8 4 Pulse output
311. t D 1 D BE type data PF D division O Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later 15 62 Boo lean Floating point type data sine operation F315 Floating point type P315 data cosine operation Pe Floating point type data tangent operation F317 Floating point type P317 data arcsine operation F318 Floating point type P318 data arccosine operation F319 Floating point type P319 data arctangent operation Floating point type P data natural logarithm o i S 1 S gt D 1 D m D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D S D COS S 1 S gt D 1 D TAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D PTAN PASIN S D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D ACOS S COS S 1 S gt D 1 D PACOS LN S LN S 1 S gt D 1 D Floating point type EXP S D EXP S 1 S gt D 1 D data exponent PEXP Floating point type LOG S D LOG S 1 S gt D 1 D data logarithm PLOG 16 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion 32 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion F327 P327 Floating point type data to 16 bit integer conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data Floating point type data to 32 bit integer conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data F328 P32
312. t in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9082 link 1 mode Turns off when epee is stopped when an error Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9083 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9084 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9085 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9086 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error MEWNET i occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode WO Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9087 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error link 1 occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode trans Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9088 mission link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error assurance occurs or when not in the PC PLC d Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC R9089 link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 11
313. t number setting for MEWNET W0 1 to 16 PC PLC link Note The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC PLC link Link area configuration word word For PC L for 1024 points 1sthalf For PC LD for 128 words 1st half link O link O I 127 128 ihe A L for 1024 points 2nd half Sind a LD for 128 words ond half in in 63 T 64 y 127 _ 255 For link relay For link register Link areas consist of link relays and link registers and are divided into areas for PC PLC link 0 and PC PLC link 1 and used with those units The link relay which can be used in an area for either PC PLC link 0 or PC PLC link 1 is maximum 1024 points 64 words and the link register is maximum 128 words Aes ner Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 7 38 Example of allocation The areas for PC PLC link are divided into send areas and receive areas The link relays and link registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC Link relays and link registers with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving side For PC PLC link 0 Link relay allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Un
314. t used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s KO Sampling by the SMPL instruction DT90028 Sample trace interval K1 to K3000 x 10 ms 10 ms to 30 s N A DT90029 Notused J CNA CNA The contents of the specified message Data Character storage by length are stored in these special data A F149 MSG instruction registers when F149 MSG instruction is executed DT90036 Notused f CNA NA Note Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG 15 22 FPOR A Available N A Not available ates time eneton Pe The number of data that match the searched Work1 f R pt90037 Work for SRC data is stored here when F96 SRC A NA instructions os Insturction is executed The position of the first matching data is Work f R a DT90038 a one stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is A N A instructions executed DT90039 Notused J CNA NAA DT90040 Notused J CNA NAA DT90041 Notused NA CNA DT90042 Notused J CCNA NA DT90043 Notused J CCNA CNA DT90044 Notused J CCNA CNA DT90045 Notused J NA CNA DT90046 Notused J SNA CNA DT90047 Notused CCNA CNA DT90048 Notused J CNA NAA DT90049 Notused J NAA NAA DT90050 Notused J NAA CNA DT90051 Notused J NA CNA The p
315. ta 32 PDSORT S2 the area specified by S1 to S2 are bit s3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F282 Scaling of SCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the 16 bit data input value X by performing scaling e for the given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the P283 32 bit data PDSCAL S2 D input value X by performing scaling 10 for the given data table F284 inclination S1 Executes the linear output for the P284 output of 16 bit S2 specified time from the specified 10 gt data S3 D initial value to the target value 0 Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 When S1 gt 83 S1 D P285 lower limit PLIMT S2 When 1 lt S3 S2 D i i control S3 D When S1 lt or S8 lt or S2 S3 gt D 16 bit data O Available lt Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 15 61 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH rand F286 Upper and DLIMT S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S34 1 S3 S1 1 P286 lower limit PDLIMT 3 D 1 gt D 1 D control When S2 1 N S3 1 S3 S2 1 32 bit data S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 gt D 1 D F287 Deadband BAN
316. ta P85 complement of 2 F86 32 bit data P86 complement of 2 F87 16 bit data ABS P87 absolute PABS F88 32 bit data DABS P88 absolute PDABS F89 16 bit data EXT P89 sign extension PEXT F90 Decode DECO P90 PDECO F91 7 segment SEGT P91 decode PSEGT ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and PENCO stores it in D The part is specified by n 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the combine PUNIT n words of data beginning at S are stored united in order in D Q Available Not available Not available partially Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts the sign Gives the absolute value of the data of D Gives the absolute value of the data of D 1 D Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 D S n D Decodes part of the data of S and stores itin D The part is specified by n D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 segment display and stores it in D 1 S u V T U o N Oo O N 15 51 I E a W A Poo Ope Description A TE N fa ma F94 16 bit data distribute DIST S n Each of the digits of the data of S P94 PDIST D are stored in distributed to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at D ASC S D Twelve characters of the character Char
317. tarting at D Program read t The program specified using S is e x ffx xo from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory 3 x x x x x O memory card card and executes it Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2 0 or later and FP e F8 P8 O 15 47 FP2SH FP10SH P15 exchange PXCH a P16 nE PDXCH eae D2 D1 1 D1 F17 Higher lower SWAP The higher byte and lower byte of D P17 byte in 16 bit PSWAP are exchanged data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 Exchange the data between D1 and P18 block PBXCH D2 D3 D2 with the data specified by D3 exchange Control instruction F19 Auxiliary jump SJP The program jumps to the label S ed SP instruction specified by S and continues from there Binary arithmetic instructions 16 bit data S D mo aons eg a addition PD addition P S2 D addition PD S2 D E Ni subtraction Subiraoion a ieee e zo OTT riek P27 subtraction S2 D j P28 subtraction S2 D muitipication S2 D F31 matipestion PD S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 P31 multiplication S2 D eh D division LA S2 D 5 D ee DT9015 32 bit data D division PD al 1 S2 1 S2 quotient D 1 16 bit data multiplication i S2 D A A Boo lean Description S A es A TE ka lA k lA lA A aid
318. the absolute value of real number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D The data in degrees of an angle specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees S D Y o FABS PFABS p 5 RAD PRAD F337 S P337 Floating point type data degree radian o F338 P338 p o Floating point type data radian degree Converts real number data specified p p o Floating point type real number data processing instructions Floating point FCMP S1 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 R900A on type data compare PFCMP S2 S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on Floating point FWIN S1 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on type data band PFWIN S2 S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 R900B on 141 1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on OQ Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later F346 P346 compare op iS 15 64 4 2 3 gies Oe rand Floating point FLIMT 1 S2 type data PFLIMT 3 D upper and lower limit control Floating point FBAND 1 S2 type data PFBAND 3 D dead band control Floating point S1
319. the following 16 characters 0 to 9 and A to F can be used 8 digit password A maximum of 8 one byte characters case sensitive and symbols can be used Note Precautions on the password setting Do not forget your password If you forget your password you cannot read programs Even if you ask us for your password we cannot crack it 9 2 9 1 2 Setting using Programming Tool Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Security information dialog box J Indicates the current status of the password ee _ setting gt ae tenner Specify the type of the password to be used B De ORT SNR Faceci G Specify an operation mode 5 C 4 digtstHex as a Access Accesses programs by inputting a i password Protect Sets a password 3 lt ae _ Unprotect Releases the password setting C Unprotect Input a password a 5 Those are the settings when using the FP 44 Enterin alphanumeric memory loader Ver 2 0 or later Setting for FP memory loader option 5 lt Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Confirmation the contents of the password setting Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box Curr
320. ting Control unit on a panel horizontally AFP0804 10 pack Relay output Molex type I O Loose wiring cable 9 leads AW G20 with Molex socket Length 1m AFP0551 2 cable set cable attached at one end 0 5mm 1 set 2 cables blue white Length 3m AFP0553 2 cable set Transistor output type I O Loose wiring cable 10 leads AW G22 with connector Length 1m AFP0521 2 cable set cable attached at one end 0 3mm 1 set 2 cables blue white Length 3m AFP0523 2 cable set Terminal socket AFP0802 2 cable set Molex socket AFP0801 2 cable set Wire press socket AFP0807 2 cable set FPO Power supply cable AFP0581 1 pack FPOR FP Power supply SD En Attaches to FPOR control unit Maintenance parts Length 1m AFPG805 1 pack 1 6 1 2 Restrictions on Unit Combination Maximum possible expansion is with a total of three untis Contorol unit Expansion Expansion Expansion unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 Up to three expansion units can be added on the right of the FPOR these expansion units being either expansion units or intelligent units A combination of relay output and transistor output types is also possible Controllable I O points control unit using control unit is the same output type is a transistor output typ 14 points Max 62 points Max 110 points 16 points Max 112 points Max 112 points C32 32 points Max 128 points Max 128 points F32 Note Install the FPO thermocouple unit on the right side
321. tion and Time onn d i Time Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time Speed change command 8 54 JOG positioning control Type 0 F171 Specify the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed 50 kHz as acceleration time and the time from the maximum speed 50 kHz to the initial soeed as deceleration time in the program The actual acceleration deceleration time is relatively shorter than the specified acceleration deceleration time Each section between the initial speed and the maximum speed 50 kHz and between the maximum speed 50 kHz and the initial speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed Therefore the acceleration deceleration is not as smooth compared to the JOG positioning control Type 1 especially when the target speed is low To use in a low speed area with a device such as a stepping motor select the type 1 After the execution of the instruction the speed can be changed within the range of the maximum speed 50 kHz Deceleration time in program Frequency Acceleration time in program Frequency Acceleration time in a Hl Deceleration time in program SOKHZ cncpecccccccegGh speececccccces 50kHz Calculates the section larget speed eae ae Calculates the section between between SOkHz and Spake gece alan y between SOKH and initial speed
322. tion during main program 1 Execution during interrupt program Trigger is level type m Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental 1 Absolute m Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Precautions during programming For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 Performing rewriting during RUN stops the pulse output When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed When the instruction is started during the interrupt program specify the execution in the interrupt program with the control code When describing the same channel in both the normal program and the interrupt program be sure to program not to execute them simultaneously 8 38 8 4 10 Speed Change After Starting Trapezoidal Control Type 0 F171 The explanation below shows the program to change the speed to a speed below the target speed during the trapezoidal control Use the type 0 to change the speed to a speed slower than the target speed Time chart Deceleration time Frequency Acceleration time Combined 1000 ms N Target speed 10kHZ Target speed after speed change KHZ F 4 ee ae Initial speed 1kHz f 22 3 Ee eee ee h Fositioning operation start Fos
323. tion of the pulse stop request output instructions F171 to F177 Request of Can be used as an input to start positioning control when position control executing the JOG positioning instruction F171 8 24 FPOR Pulse output control flag area 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 e The area DT90052 for writing channels pros and control codes is allocated as shown in ESS SSS o the left figure Chane speiteaton Fixed at H1 PLS e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data register DT90380 to DT90383 Position control request JOG positioning 0 Invalid 1 Valid Deceleration stop request 0 Invalid 1 Valid Near home input O Invalid 1 Valid Forced stop request 0 Invalid 1 Valid Clear of Pulse output control 0 Continue 1 Clear Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes Pulse output control flag monitor area Channel No Control code monitor area CHO DT90380 CH1 DT90381 CH2 DT90382 CH3 DT90383 8 25 8 4 5 Forced Stop Deceleration Stop FO Instruction Pulse output control instruction FO Forced stop and deceleration stop is executed by FO MV instruction in combination with the special data register DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example Performing the forced stop of pulse output For CHO For CH1 X7 X8 DF F0 MV H108 DT90052 DF FO Mv H1108 DT900
324. tioning F172 PLSH Pulse output JOG operation F173 PWMH PWM output control operation continues continues continues 4 The regular sampling trace will not stop 12 12 12 5 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Rewrite procedure Operation of each Instruction OT KP High level Instructions MC MCE CALL SUB RET INT IRET Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is executed online the program will be rewritten lt Biockn If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held When writing MC MEC instructions be sure to write the instructions as a pair A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction An interrupt program is a program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction Rewriting per
325. to H8000 Specify the port to be changed KO Tool pot K1 COM RS232C port Changing from computer link to general purpose R R9032 0 Hor Hiji 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 KI Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed KO Tool port K1 COM RS232C port R9032 The COM port mode flag turns on when general purpose serial communication mode is selected Note When the power is turned on the operating mode selected in system register 412 takes effect It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode 7 28 7 5 7 Setting Communication Parameters Tool port COM port The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click Tool Port or COM Port from the left list Dialog box of PLC system register setting Tool port selection screen PLC Configuration Untitlel x Hold Non hold Action on Error A 1 X m No 413 Communication Format Time No410 Unit No i Link 0 0 No 412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits Link 0 1 Re eral EmA MEARAN Ae oa as Controller input settings HSC General Communication Parity Odd Controller output settings PLS 7PM Modem Enabled Wa Stop Bit fi Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Terminator cr 7 Time constant setting of CPU input Header STX not exist
326. tput FUNCION in 5 oatcte teases eae aca aoe 8 57 9 SOCULILY FUNCUONS srsrrrieaanna anaran E naaraan AENEAN AAE N 9 1 O71 Password Folrect FUNCTION ccorarere n a T E 9 2 9 2 UDIOAG ProtectUsers 9 8 9 3 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader cccscccseeceeeeseceeeceeeeenseees 9 9 9 4 Table of Security Settings Cancel cccccccccssececeeeeseeeesaeeeseeeesaaeeeeees 9 12 10 Other FPUNGCIONS siccsencecsssseccsseccesseesessicnesvewevawewessvewssaneeeaeesanen 10 1 TOTP TS CP IGG I WAST CHO Mca iota ios cece a 10 2 102 Sampling Trance FUNCOM wessise t iein a ited eae 10 3 10 3 Time Constant ProcESSiNOssrsiasi a a idteee altace 10 6 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting cceeseeeesees 11 1 1124 SSI DIAGMOSUC TUM CHO estie a EEE 11 2 T2 WOU ISSO WIN Oia ae again E aan eect een 11 3 TES Operalon EONS coreene EE E EE TEE E 11 9 12 Precautions During PrograMMiIng 1 ccsssecseseeseseeeeseeeees 12 1 1221 S670 Duplicated OUMU ens conde adit eae a caer 12 2 12 2 Handling Index ReGISters ccccseccseccesececeseeeceeeceeeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeenaes 12 4 12 3 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method ccceeeeeseeeeeees 12 6 12 4 Precautions for Programming ccccccseccseceseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeceeeseeeneeeseeenaes 12 9 12 5 Rewrite Function Dunno RUN eceso 12 10 12 6 Processing During Forced Input and Output cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 15 1S SDECITICATIOINS miira
327. tructions R900A on R900B on TA S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on F60 16 bit data CMP S1 S2 compare PCMP 32 bit data DCMP S1 S2 compare PDCMP S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on 16 bit data band S1 S2 S1 gt S3 gt R900A on compare wih 3 S2 lt or S1 lt or S3 R9YOOB on S1 lt S2 R900C on Q Available Not available Not available partially _ m ee mmnm mn ee ee mM mM 15 49 Boo lean FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH Description rand S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on S3 S2 1 S2 lt or S14 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 R9OOB on S141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on 1 S2 Compares the two blocks beginning with 3 S2 and S3 to see if they are equal 1 S2 D DWIN PDWIN 32 bit data band compare F64 Block data BCMP P64 compare PBCMP Logic operation instructions pwa AND PWAN F66 16 bitdata WOR re POR 16 bit data XOR exclusive PXOR OR 16 bit data exclusive oO S1 AND S2 gt D S1 S2 D S1 OR S2 9 D S1 S2 D S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 gt D P67 F68 S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 D P68 XNR PXNR S1 S2 D N NOR Pea jI6bitdata WUN S1 S2 51 AND S3 OR S2 AND S3 gt D aii When S3 is HO S2 gt D When S3 is HEFFF S1 D Data conversion instructions Block check BCC
328. tructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string S1 S2 D u u u These instructions retrieve a character string consisting of a specified number of characters from the specified position in the character string These instructions write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the character string A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the character string Available Not available Not available partially This instruction is available for FPE 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FPX Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later NNW oS w F264 P264 Writing a character string to a character string Replacing character strings NO NO O O NO O _ 15 60 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope ae Boolean p Description rand Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum S1 Searches the maximum value in the P270 value word S2 D word data table between the S1 and data 16 bit S2 and stores it in the D The a IL address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F271 Maximum DMAX S1 Searches for the maximum value in P271 value double PDMAX S2 D the double word data table between wo
329. tware in the same category as the device 8 Although the following warning dialog box appears click Install this driver software anyway R Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device Install this driver software anyway Only install driver software obtained from yoy manufacturer s website or Mee Unsigned SOnwdre TOI Gtr SUPCeS may harm your computer or steal information e See details 9 The installation of the driver software begins Once the installation completes successfully the following screen will be displayed __ Update Driver Software Panasonic Ele Works SUN Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device Panasonic Electric Works SUNIX PLO Virtual UART In this case the USB port has been assigned to COM4 However it may differ depending on the environment of the PC you use 6 9 6 1 3 Confirming COM Ports The USB connected to the FPOR is recognized as a COM port by a PC The COM port number assigned to the USB differs according to the PC environment How to confirm COM port 1 Connect the PLC and a PC with a USB cable 2 Display Device Manager For Windows Vista or Windows 7 Select Windows Start Menu gt Computer gt System Properties gt Device Manager Fo
330. ulse output instruction can be continued or cleared by writing a value with MV instruction FO Control code setting FPOR type 13 12 43210 C l DT90052 High speed counter Channel setting A A control flag HSC 0 to 5 CHO to CHS HSC 0 HSC High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear HSC Hardware reset Note 0 Enable 1 Disable HSC Count 0 Enable 1 Disable HSC Software reset 0 No 1 Yes 15 23 DT90052 15 24 Pulse output control flag FPOR A Available N A Not available seas vane tin A value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting FPOR type 654321 0 TOTO TILT Channel setting PLS 0 3 CHO CH3 PLS 1 PLS Position control start request 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Deceleration stop request 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Near home input 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Clear PLS Pulse output control match ON OFF 0 Continue 1 Cancel PLS Count 0 Enable 1 Disable PLS Software reset 0 No 1 Yes FPOR A Available N A Not available Paess neme ernton ng ig Ing Ing Hour and minute data of the clock calender are stored here This data is read only data It Clock calender cane be overwritten DT90053 monitor hour minute _Higher byte Lower byte i T32 only L sc 5 Hour data Minute data HOO to H23 HOO to H59
331. unication program is required on the PLC side Specify the communication format only by the system register The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Example of connection to the computer lt 1 1 communication gt Tool port Computer side FPOR side D SUB 9 pin Mini DIN 5 pin Symbol Pin no O1DIO 0100 win f oim D ES ul amp AiO 1D om COM port RS232C port Computer side D SUB 9 pin FPOR side 3 pin terminal RD R SG G 7 4 5 1 N Communication MEWTOCOL Slave Function A computer and PLCs are connected through a commercially available RS232C RS485 converter and the respective computer and PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable with crossover wiring The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the unit number and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer FPOR FPOR FPOR FPOR Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit ek Computer O a Commercial o E converter The unit number for the PLE to which the command is being sent is included in the command message The unit number of the PLC sending a response is included in the response message Note LINEEYE CO LTD SI 35 is recommended to be u
332. unit can be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail 9 3 5 1 3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate When using the slim type FPO mounting plate AFP0803 Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below 4mm 90 mm 6mm The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails installation O 6 mn x p SA 1 Note When using an expansion unit tighten the screws after joining all of the mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example When using the maximum numbers of the expansion units with AFP0803 lt Four plates in series gt lt Mounting hole dimensions gt 25 0 25 0 25 0 n E a m o 60 0 eee 5 4 When using the flat type mounting plate AFP0804 Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below 90 0 mm 60 0 mm 6 2mm Raise the expansion hooks of the unit Align the expan
333. ust be conducted simultaneously Power supply sequence Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the control unit turns off before the power supply for input and output If the input output power supply is turned off before the control unit or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws Set the mode selector to PROG mode Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program Refer to the respective tool software manuals for the details of the operation procedure Tool software FPWIN Pro FPWIN GR Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of files documents should be printed out and then saved Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to
334. ut Circular interpolation the path to the target position forms an arc Available X Not available Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels 2 This instruction is available for FPX C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H 15 58 FP2SH FP10SH Boolean OPA Description rand bal display instructions pi S3 S4 the FP e registration FP e screen Specify the screen to be displayed E eee DEO switching Basic function instruction constant S3 D the specified input O processing F183 Sd DSTM Turn on the specified output and 0 01 s x set value Data transfer instructions aa T P190 data move PMV3 S3 Do 53 gt o reset moan P191 data move PDMV3 S3 DO ae a E E D 5 D 4 Logic operation instructions F215 32 bit data DAND a S2 a S1 AND S2 1 P215 AND PDAND a D P216 OR PDOR F217 32 bit data DXOR ST S2 S14 1 a AND S241 S2 gt D 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR S1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND a S2 Sle e e EEE IO D D P218 Double word PM 830 TSP S1 AND S3 1 S3 el 32 bit data S3 DO FA S2 AND S3 1 O unites D 1 D Data conversion instructions Time data gt TMSEC S D The specified time data a date Pm second Pse and time is changed to second efxlo si conversion data ot Second The specified second data is effo data time PSECTM changed into time data a date and conversion time Q Available Not ava
335. ut type only target CH is stored in each CH DT90384 DT90385 DT90386 DT90387 DT90388 DT90389 15 36 FPOR A Available N A Not available ste n DT90400 E Ee vali Available for the transistor output type only DT90401 Higher words Note When controlling the F166 HC1S F167 HC1R DT90403 Higher words instructions the target DT90404 Target value value is stored area for match The target value for match KALI DT90405 ON OFF Higher words ON OFF is stored Corrected PLS The initial speed of the DT90406 speed of initial CHO calculated result is stored speed Lower words mm The minimum speed for the change of speed DT90407 minimum mm pT90408 Acceleration If the elapsed value corsses me forbidden area over this position when startin changing the speed DT90409 ositi o Higher words acceleration cannot be p performed DT90410 Elapsed value Available for the transistor output type only DT90411 Higher words Note When controlling the DT90412 pulse output CH by eevee F166 HC1S F167 HC1R EA DT90413 Higher words instructions the target E3 DT90414 Target value value is stored area for match The target value for match DT90415 ON OFF Higher words ON OFF is stored Corrected PLS The initial speed of the DT90416 speed of initial CH1 calculated result is stored speeg Lower words nm The minimum T for the DT90418 Acceleration If the elapsed value corsses forbidden area over t
336. v and select PC Link 3 Key Point When using a PC PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed No Name i SetValue Communication format Char bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps 1 37 7 6 4 Link Area Allocation The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC PLC link are allocated in the link area of the CPU unit Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit System registers ea O Ta value Range of link relays used for PC PLC link O0 Oto64words Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link O Oto 128 words 42 Starting number for link relay transmission O Oto6S 43 Link relay transmission size LO Oto 4 Words 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 Oto127 45 Link data register transmission size O _ Oto127words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half 47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 1 to 16 0 PC PLC link 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half 50 Range of link relays used for PC PLC link O0 Oto64words 5 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 Oto128words 53 Link relay transmission size O Oto64words O0 0to127 words 57 Maximum uni
337. vorcods Set according to the control code on the next page H1001 0010 Initial speed Hz DT304_ Target speed Hz Deceleration time ms ER Target value pulses 824000 Positive direction K 2 147 483 648 to K g p K 45600 Negative direction 2 147 483 647 Note 1 Each setting item occupies 2 word data registers 2 When the control type 0 No target value is specified for the control code the target value pulse number of data table is invalid 3 For the JOG operation the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed 50 kHz is specified as acceleration time or deceleration time For the details refer to 8 4 17 Difference in Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions 8 31 Sample program R9013 F1 DMV H10010010 DT 300 F1 DMV K41000 DT 302 F1 DMV K5000 DT 304 F1 DMV K120 DT 306 F1 DMV K120 DT308 R9013 F1 DMV DT32450 DT 90400 R31 R9120 R31 R3A DF R3A R3B DF w f R3B R32 F1 omv K324000 DT310 RsT gt 4 R32 R9120 R32 R3C HDF R3C R3D pF Ji 4 R3D R31 F1 omv K 45600 DT310 RSD R3A F172 PLSH DT300 KO R3C R9010 F1 Dmv DT90400 DT 32450 Control code 10 Fixed Control assignment 0 JOG m Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 without target value 1 Type 1 with target values 0 Fixed u Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only es Movement direction In cas
338. x COM Port No 415 Baudrate 9600 bps No 420 Starting address for data received of 4096 g serial data communication mode pI AEE No 421 Buffer capacity setting for data received of 2048 0 2048 serial data communication mode Cancel Bead PLE Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode Click General communication No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port For using the RS485 type make the same setting as that of the baud rate switches 19200 or 115200 bps No 416 Starting address for data received For the tool port No 420 No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received For the tool port No 421 For the general purpose serial communication setting Receive buffer is required To change this area specify the starting address using system register No 416 or 420 and the volume number of words using No 4170r 421 The r
339. xecuted as long as this flag is ON The pulse output instruction flags are allocated to each channel Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Operation of pulse output instruction flag The pulse output instruction flags vary even during scanning Replace them with internal relays at the beginning of the program when using them several times in the program 8 4 19 Common Precautions for Pulse Output Instructions Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the pulse output Precautions when using instructions in PULSE SIGN mode Common to F171 F172 F175 F177 When each instruction is executed pulses are output approx 300us after the direction signal has been output the motor drive characteristics are simultaneously taken into consideration Stop by pulse output control instruction F0 Common to F171 F172 F174 F175 F177 When executing the deceleration stop with the pulse output control instruction F0 the operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the deceleration operation starts When the deceleration stop request flag bit 5 of DT90052 is on instructions cannot be executed As for the data table control instruction F174 the operation is similar to that of the forced stop When executing the forced stop pulse output stop with the pulse output control instruction F0 the operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the pulse out
340. xecuted in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination of operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type gt Enter the correct combination of operands Program may be damaged gt Try to send the program again When inputting with the programming tool software a deletion addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 15 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error ier tion Description and steps to take code HK x status RR W Lh Probably a hardware abnormality E20 CPU error Stops Siemet contact your dealer PTT TT aa error error2 RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM Stops Please contact P RE RAM error5 Master memory The models of master memories are different A model Stops Use the master memories created with the 1 unmatch same model error FP e FP0 FPOR FP and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memory cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When t
341. y Mode with FPO FPO Compatibility Mode Programming Example of General purpose Serial Communication in FPO compatibility mode The high level instruction F144 TRNS is used to send and receive data via the COM port RS232C port The F159 MTRN instruction is used in the normal FPOR mode 3 Key Point In the FPO compatibility mode the F144 TRNS instruction is used instead of F159 MTRN instruction F144 TRNS instruction Data is sent and received between the FPOR and an external device via the COM port RS232C port FO S n F144 TRNS DT100 K8 _ Serial data communication starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that can be specified for n WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD l0 to ID K H Sending data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from the COM port Receiving data Data can be received when the reception done flag is off The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system regi

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP0R User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents